CONTROLS for Your BMW Z4 2 Door Third Generation (2018-2026)

Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Dashboard  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
In the vicinity of the steering wheel  
1
Power windows 100  
Unlocking 90  
Locking 90  
2
3
Exterior mirror adjustment button 113  
Unlocking the trunk lid 94  
5
6
Seating comfort features  
Memory function 115  
4
Central locking system  
Lights  
30  
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Light switch 162  
Manual Speed Limiter 194  
Lights off  
Depending on the equipment:  
Cruise Control on/off 196  
Daytime driving lights 164  
Parking lights 163  
Automatic headlight control 162  
Adaptive lighting functions 164  
Active Cruise Control on/off 199  
Cruise Control: store the speed  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
165  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept  
suggested speed 206  
Low-beam headlights 163  
Interrupting Cruise Control  
Instrument lighting 167  
Continuing cruise control  
Right roadside parking light 163  
Left roadside parking light 163  
Active Cruise Control: increase  
distance  
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis-  
tance  
7
Turn signal lever  
Turn signal 129  
Cruise Control rocker switch  
10 Instrument cluster 142  
11 Steering wheel buttons, right  
Selection lists 157  
High-beam headlights, head-  
light flasher 129  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
165  
Volume, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
Instrument cluster with enhanced  
features: widgets 143  
Voice activation system 50  
Instrument cluster without en-  
hanced features: widgets 144  
Trip data 157  
Telephone, see Owner's Manual  
for Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
8
9
Shift paddles 133  
Steering wheel buttons, left  
Knurled wheel for selection lists 157  
12 Wiper lever  
31  
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Wipers 130  
14  
Steering wheel heating 115  
Rain sensor 130  
15 Adjusting the steering wheel 115  
16 Fold-out compartment 249  
Cleaning the windshield and  
headlights 130  
17  
Unlocking the hood 298  
13  
Horn, entire surface  
In the vicinity of the center console  
1
Control display 45  
Hazard warning system 313  
5
6
Automatic climate control 231  
2
Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communi-  
cation 6  
Intelligent Safety 172  
7
Controller with buttons 45  
8
Opening and closing the  
convertible top 102  
3
4
Ventilation 236  
Glove compartment 250  
32  
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
9
Parking brake 126  
Automatic Hold 127  
ECO PRO drive mode  
ADAPTIVE drive mode  
10  
Driving Experience Control 139  
SPORT drive mode  
11  
Turning the drive-ready state  
on/off 122  
COMFORT drive mode  
12  
Auto Start/Stop function 122  
Parking assistance systems 208  
Dynamic Stability Control 189  
13 Steptronic transmission selector lever 133  
In the vicinity of the headliner  
1
Emergency Call, SOS 315  
2
Indicator light, front passenger  
airbag 172  
33  
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
3
Reading lights 167  
4
Interior lights 167  
34  
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Sensors of the vehicle  
Vehicle features and options Cameras  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
Cameras behind the windshield  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Overview  
The cameras behind the windshield are lo-  
cated near the interior mirror.  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-  
cle:  
Rearview camera  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.  
Rearview camera.  
Front radar sensor.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
Keep the vehicle cameras and sensors, as well  
as surrounding areas, clean and unobstructed.  
The rearview camera is located in the trunk lid  
handle.  
System limits of the cameras  
The cameras may not be fully operational and  
may provide incorrect information in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
▷
▷
In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.  
On steep hills, in steep depressions or in  
tight curves.  
▷
When the camera field of view is covered,  
for instance by a fogged up windshield or  
labels.  
35  
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.  
Radar sensors, side, rear  
When driving toward bright lights or strong  
reflections, e.g., because of a setting sun.  
▷
▷
When it is dark outside.  
Camera behind the windshield: if the cam-  
era has overheated and been temporarily  
switched off due to excessively high tem-  
peratures.  
▷
Camera behind the windshield: during cali-  
bration of the camera immediately after ve-  
hicle delivery.  
The radar sensors are located to the side be-  
hind the rear bumper.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
System limits of the radar sensors  
The radar sensors may be restricted or not  
available in the following situations:  
Radar sensors  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
If sensors are dirty such as due to icing.  
If sensors are covered such as by labels,  
films or a number plate baseplate.  
▷
▷
▷
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the  
driver assistance systems can be impaired by  
external influences, e.g., interference. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Watch the surrounding traffic situation  
closely, be ready to take over steering and  
braking at any time, and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.  
When the field of view of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow  
hills, vehicles or trailers.  
▷
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the  
road.  
Front radar sensor  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
The front radar sensor is located in the front  
bumper.  
36  
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic  
sources.  
Ultrasonic sensors  
▷
▷
Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high  
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-  
treme heat, or strong wind.  
Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear  
bumpers  
The ultrasonic sensors for Park  
Distance Control are located in  
the front and rear bumpers.  
With tow bars and trailer couplings of other  
vehicles.  
▷
▷
▷
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.  
With moving objects.  
With elevated, protruding objects such as  
ledges.  
Ultrasonic sensors, side  
▷
▷
With objects with corners, edges, and  
smooth surfaces.  
For objects with fine surfaces or objects like  
fences, plants, or bushes.  
▷
▷
For objects with porous surfaces.  
With small and low objects, for instance  
boxes.  
▷
With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in  
foam material.  
The ultrasonic sensors for Parking Assistant  
are located to the side in the front and rear  
bumpers.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
In automatic car washes.  
On uneven surfaces such as speed bumps.  
Due to heavy exhaust.  
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of  
the vehicle is not taken into account by the  
ultrasonic sensors.  
System limits of the ultrasonic  
sensors  
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-  
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in  
the following situations:  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
▷
▷
▷
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by  
stickers.  
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
▷
▷
For small children and animals.  
For persons with certain clothing, for in-  
stance jacket.  
▷
In case of external interference with the  
ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-  
37  
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Operating state of the vehicle  
Safety information  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
General information  
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in  
one of the three states:  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
▷
▷
▷
Idle state.  
Standby state.  
Drive-ready state.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Idle state  
Principle  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched  
off.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
General information  
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening  
from the outside and after exiting and locking.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
38  
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Automatic idle state  
For instance, the idle state is automatically es-  
tablished under the following conditions:  
Standby state  
Principle  
▷
▷
▷
After several minutes, if no operation takes  
place on the vehicle.  
When standby state is switched on, most func-  
tions can be used while the vehicle is station-  
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.  
If the charge state of the vehicle battery is  
low.  
Depending on the configuration via iDrive:  
one or both front doors will be opened after  
driving when exiting the vehicle.  
General information  
The vehicle is in the standby state after the  
front doors are opened from the outside.  
In some situations, the idle state is not set au-  
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or  
when the low-beam headlights are switched  
on.  
Standby, manual  
General information  
Standby can be switched back on after the ve-  
hicle is automatically set to idle state.  
Establishing idle state when  
opening the front doors  
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established  
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,  
the driver and front passenger must exit the  
vehicle.  
Via button on the radio  
Press the button on the radio.  
The control display and the in-  
strument cluster illuminate.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"  
Via start/stop button  
Press the Start/Stop button. The  
control display and the instru-  
ment cluster illuminate.  
Manual idle state  
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com-  
pletion of trip:  
Press and hold the button on  
the radio until the OFF indicator  
on the instrument cluster goes  
out.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
OFF is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster. The drivetrain is  
switched off and standby state  
switched on.  
39  
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Drive-ready state  
NOTICE  
Repeatedly attempting to start the engine or  
Principle  
Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to  
starting the engine.  
repeatedly starting the vehicle in rapid suc-  
cession can cause the starter to overheat.  
This also results in unburned or inadequately  
burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic con-  
verter to overheat. There is a risk of damage  
to property. Avoid repeated starting of the  
vehicle, particularly repeated starting in rapid  
succession.  
General information  
Some functions such as the Dynamic Stability  
Control can only be used with the drive-ready  
state turned on.  
Safety information  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
DANGER  
Principle  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is  
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-  
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain  
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.  
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also  
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a  
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and  
ensure sufficient ventilation.  
Drive-ready state is switched on  
via the Start/Stop button.  
Manual transmission  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to Neu-  
tral.  
Warning  
3. Press the Start/Stop button.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
The ignition is activated automatically for a  
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-  
gine starts.  
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in-  
strument cluster illuminate for a varied length  
of time.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Steptronic transmission  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
The ignition is activated automatically for a  
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-  
gine starts.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in-  
strument cluster illuminate for a varied length  
of time.  
40  
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Gasoline engine  
Depending on the motorization, full drive  
power and the entire rotational speed range  
may not be available for approx. 30 seconds  
after starting the engine. In this case, the vehi-  
cle will not accelerate as usual.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Tachometer, refer to page 152.  
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:  
Power gauge, refer to page 152.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The activated drive-ready state is indicated  
in the instrument cluster, depending on the  
equipment, by the display of information re-  
quired for driving or the READY display.  
Turning off drive-ready state  
Manual transmission  
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the  
Start/Stop button.  
The engine is switched off. The vehicle  
switches into standby state.  
2. Shift into first gear or reverse gear.  
3. Set the parking brake.  
Steptronic transmission  
1. Engage selector lever position P with the  
vehicle stopped.  
2. Set the parking brake.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button.  
The engine is switched off. The vehicle  
switches into standby state.  
41  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
iDrive  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Input and display  
Main menu  
General information  
The main menu is divided into two areas. The  
left area contains menu items that can be used  
to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area  
contains widgets that provide quick access to  
certain functions.  
Operating concept  
Principle  
iDrive is the operating concept of the infotain-  
ment system and includes a large number of  
functions.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions  
can be operated as follows:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Via the Controller.  
Media/Radio  
Via the control display.  
All functions of the entertainment system,  
e.g., radio stations or connection with external  
devices.  
Via the touchpad.  
Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.  
Communication  
Safety information  
Phone and message functions, e-mail  
and calendar, and also the connection and  
management of mobile devices such as smart-  
phones.  
Warning  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
Navigation  
Access to the navigation system, desti-  
nation input and traffic bulletins. Configurable  
map views and other functions such as points  
of interest and areas to be avoided.  
42  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
My Car  
Information about vehicle status and trips.  
Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual and  
also administration of driver profiles and range  
of adjustments for vehicle and iDrive.  
ery character entered, with characters being  
added as necessary.  
Entries are continuously compared with data  
stored in the vehicle.  
▷
Only those letters and numbers are offered  
during entry for which data is available.  
Apps  
▷
Destination search: place names can be  
entered in all languages that are available  
in iDrive.  
Management of apps, access to apps and  
vehicle functions. Additional apps and vehicle  
functions can be purchased from the BMW  
Store.  
Activating/deactivating the functions  
Several menu items are preceded by a check-  
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func-  
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the  
menu item activates or deactivates the func-  
tion.  
Widgets  
Widgets provide quick access to fre-  
quently used functions. The configured widg-  
ets display dynamic contents such as the nav-  
igation map, and serve as interfaces at the  
same time.  
Function is activated.  
Function is deactivated.  
Letters and numbers  
Letters and numbers can be selected when  
making the destination input, for example.  
Status information  
General information  
Letters and numbers can be entered using the  
controller, touchpad, control display, or voice  
control, depending on vehicle equipment. The  
keyboard's display changes automatically.  
The status field can be found in the upper area  
of the control display. Status information is dis-  
played in the form of icons.  
Icon  
Function  
Telephone icons  
Change between capital and  
lower-case letters.  
Icon Meaning  
Incoming or outgoing call.  
Missed call.  
Enter a blank space.  
Switching between languages.  
Use voice control.  
Signal strength of mobile phone net-  
work.  
Confirm entry.  
Network search.  
Shift the input area to the left  
or right.  
Mobile phone network is not available.  
The critical charge state of the mobile  
phone has been reached.  
Entry comparison  
When entering names and addresses, the  
selection is gradually narrowed down for ev-  
Roaming is active.  
Locating is active.  
43  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Programmable memory buttons  
Icon Meaning  
SMS text message received.  
General information  
Message received.  
Reminder.  
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro-  
grammable memory buttons and called up di-  
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation  
destinations, phone numbers and menu en-  
tries.  
Sending not possible.  
Entertainment icons  
Overview  
Icon  
Meaning  
Bluetooth audio.  
USB device.  
Connected Music with Spotify.  
Wi-Fi.  
Apple CarPlay.  
Android Auto.  
Programmable memory buttons  
Satellite radio is switched on.  
Storing a function  
Other icons  
A function can be stored on a programmable  
memory button. A button with a stored func-  
tion can be overwritten with another function.  
Icon Meaning  
Check Control message.  
1. Select function via iDrive, for instance radio  
station.  
Sound output active.  
Sound output deactivated.  
Voice activation system active.  
Request for the current vehicle position.  
Checking the current vehicle position.  
Driver profile.  
2.  
Press and hold the desired button  
until the displayed bar on the control dis-  
play has loaded completely.  
Executing a function  
Press the button.  
Notifications.  
The function will work immediately. This  
means for instance that the connection is es-  
tablished when a phone number is selected.  
Data protection.  
Destination guidance active.  
Passengers on board.  
Do not disturb.  
Displaying the key assignment  
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves  
or use objects.  
44  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The assignment of the buttons is displayed in  
the upper area of the control display.  
erty. Secure loose objects or devices that are  
connected to the vehicle via a cable.  
Deleting all button assignments  
All button assignments can be deleted.  
Warning  
Objects in the area in front of a display can  
slip and damage the display. There is a risk  
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not  
place objects in the area in front of a display.  
1. Press and hold buttons 1 and 8 at the same  
time.  
2. "OK"  
Control display and  
Controller  
Switching on/off automatically  
The control display is turned on automatically  
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the  
control display is needed for operation.  
Principle  
In certain situations, the control display is  
switched off automatically, for instance if no  
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-  
eral minutes.  
The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-  
trol display.  
Overview  
Switching on/off manually  
The control display can also be switched off  
manually.  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Screen off"  
Press the Controller or any button on the Con-  
troller to switch it back on again.  
1
Control display  
Controller  
System limits  
2
In the case of very high temperatures on the  
control display, for instance due to intense so-  
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced  
down to complete deactivation. Once the  
temperature is reduced, for instance through  
shade or air conditioning system, the normal  
functions are restored.  
Control display  
Safety information  
Warning  
Controller  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-  
General information  
The buttons can be used to open the menus  
directly. The Controller can be used to select  
menu items and enter the settings.  
45  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Operation  
Button Function  
Call up the Media/Radio menu.  
▷
Turn to switch between menu items, for ex-  
ample.  
Call up the Communication menu.  
Call up the navigation map.  
Call up the destination input menu  
for navigation.  
Call up the previous display.  
▷
Press to select a menu item, for example.  
Call up the Options menu.  
Operating via the Controller  
Opening the main menu  
Press the button.  
▷
Tilt in four directions to switch between dis-  
plays, for example.  
The main menu is displayed.  
Selecting a menu  
Buttons on the Controller  
Selecting menu items  
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu  
item is highlighted.  
Button Function  
Call up the main menu.  
2. Press the Controller.  
Go to Apps menu.  
46  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
justed, for instance to remove the entries of  
unused functions from the menu  
Selecting a widget  
1. Move the Controller in the main menu to  
the right.  
1. Select the menu.  
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget  
is selected.  
2. "Personalize menu"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
3. Press the Controller.  
It is also possible to select widgets in the in-  
strument cluster.  
Changing between displays  
After a menu item is selected, for instance  
"Settings", a new display appears.  
Adjusting the menu  
▷
Tilt the Controller to the left.  
The current display closes and the previous  
display is shown.  
Adjusting widgets  
The widgets can be adjusted in the main  
menu. It is possible to create multiple pages  
with widgets and switch between pages. The  
adjustments can only be performed when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
▷
▷
Press the button.  
The previous display re-opens.  
Tilt the Controller to the right.  
The new display opens.  
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.  
Only the currently selected page can be ad-  
justed.  
An arrow indicates that additional displays can  
be opened.  
2. Tip the Controller up.  
Going to the Options menu  
The menu items can be used to access addi-  
tional options.  
3. "Adjust main menu"  
4. Select the desired adjustment:  
▷
Icon and select desired widget: add  
new widget.  
Various options are available depending on  
the menu item selected.  
The requested widget will be inserted  
in the relevant position. A maximum of  
four widgets can be displayed per page.  
Press the button.  
Available options are displayed.  
Entering letters and numbers  
Input  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Select icon: delete selected widget.  
Add new page: "Add page".  
Delete selected page: "Delete page".  
Adjust the content of the widget: select  
widget.  
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-  
bers.  
5. "Done"  
2.  
: confirm entry.  
Adjusting contents  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the contents  
of the menus "MEDIA" and "COM" can be ad-  
47  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Deleting  
Entering letters and numbers  
▷
Enter characters as they are displayed on  
the control display.  
Icon Function  
Press the Controller: delete letters or  
number.  
▷
Always enter associated characters such as  
accents or periods so that the letter can be  
clearly recognized.  
Hold the Controller down: delete all let-  
ters or numbers.  
▷
The set language determines what input  
is possible. Where necessary, enter special  
characters via the Controller.  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-  
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can  
be displayed in a text box.  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 61.  
Entering special characters  
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right  
quickly.  
Input  
Operation  
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.  
Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the  
ter.  
touchpad.  
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-  
played in the list.  
Enter a blank  
space.  
Swipe to the right in the  
center of the touchpad.  
Operation via touchpad  
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the  
upper area of the touch-  
pad.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive  
functions can be operated with the controller  
touchpad.  
Enter an under- Swipe to the right in the  
score.  
lower area of the touch-  
pad.  
Selecting functions  
1. "CAR"  
Using the map  
The map in the navigation system can be  
moved via the touchpad. Tap the map on the  
control display and then continue the operation  
using the touchpad.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Touchpad"  
Function  
Operation  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate di-  
rection.  
Display menu. Tap once.  
48  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷
Tap icon and select desired widget:  
add new widget.  
Using alphabetical lists  
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries  
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-  
try exists.  
The requested widget will be inserted  
in the relevant position. A maximum of  
four widgets can be displayed per page.  
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.  
▷
▷
▷
Tap on the icon.  
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed  
in the list.  
The widget is made larger.  
Tap on the icon.  
The widget is made smaller.  
Tap on the icon.  
Operation via control display  
The widget is deleted.  
Add new page: tap "Add page".  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the con-  
trol display is equipped with a touchscreen.  
▷
▷
Delete selected page: tap "Delete  
page".  
You can tap on menu items and widgets.  
Touch the control display with your fingers. Do  
not use any objects.  
▷
Adjust content of the widget: tap center  
of widget.  
4. Tap "Done".  
Opening the main menu  
Showing/hiding the display bar  
Tap on the icon.  
In the upper area of the control display, it is  
possible to show or hide a display bar with  
additional functions.  
▷
To show the display bar, pull down the dis-  
play bar at the top edge of the screen.  
▷
To hide the display bar, pull up the display  
bar at the top edge of the screen.  
Changing between displays  
After a menu item is selected, a new display  
opens.  
The main menu is displayed.  
Adjusting widgets  
An arrow indicates that additional displays can  
be opened.  
The widgets can be adjusted in the main  
menu. It is possible to create multiple pages  
with widgets and switch between pages. The  
adjustments can only be performed when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
▷
▷
Swipe to the left.  
Tap arrow.  
The new display opens.  
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.  
Only the currently selected page can be ad-  
justed.  
2.  
Tap the icon in the main menu.  
3. Select the desired adjustment:  
49  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Entering letters and numbers  
BMW Intelligent Personal  
Assistant  
Input  
1. Depending on vehicle equipment, either tap  
Principle  
the  
icon on the control display, or a  
keyboard is displayed on the control display  
when approached.  
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a  
personal assistant that enables natural voice  
operation of various vehicle functions. The  
Personal Assistant simplifies the operation of  
the vehicle with the automation of processes  
and habits.  
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.  
Deleting  
Icon Function  
General information  
Tapping the icon: deletes the letter or  
number.  
▷
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-  
able depending on national-market version.  
Tapping and holding the icon all letters:  
deletes all letters or numbers.  
▷
The system includes special microphones  
on the driver side and the front passenger  
side.  
Using the map  
The navigation map can be moved on the con-  
trol display.  
▷
▷
▷
Say commands at a normal volume.  
Speaking directly into the microphone does  
not improve the speech recognition.  
Say the commands and numbers fluently  
as well as with normal volume, emphasis,  
and speed.  
Function  
Operation  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate  
direction.  
›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-  
ken.  
Enlarge/shrink  
map.  
Drag in or out with the fin-  
gers.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Display menu.  
Tap once.  
A language that is supported by the Per-  
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-  
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can  
be displayed in a text box.  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 61.  
▷
Always say commands in the configured  
system language.  
1. Tap the letter in front of the list.  
A letter box is displayed.  
For the full range of functions, the following  
functions should be activated, set or booked:  
▷
speech processing, refer to  
page 53.  
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.  
▷
For all settings under  
BMW ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual  
on navigation, entertainment, and commu-  
nication.  
50  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Activation word, refer to page 51.  
A driver profile.  
Preset activation word  
The preset activation word ›Hello BMW‹ can  
be activated and deactivated.  
Synchronize driver profile, refer to page 68.  
Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the  
ConnectedDrive Store.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
6. "Wake word"  
Activating the voice control system  
General information  
There are various methods for activating the  
voice control feature:  
7. "Wake word"  
▷
▷
Press the button on the steering  
Personal activation word  
wheel.  
In addition to a preset activation word ›Hello  
BMW‹, a personal activation word can be set  
up in the active driver profile. The personal ac-  
tivation word can also be changed or deleted.  
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-  
tive.  
Say the activation word ›Hello BMW‹ or a  
personal activation word.  
The activation word should consist of multiple  
syllables to ensure good recognition. An addi-  
tion such as ›Hello‹ is not necessary.  
The microphones on the driver's or front  
passenger's side are active with the follow-  
ing voice control, depending on where the  
activation word was spoken.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Then say the command. The activation word  
and the command can be spoken without  
pause in one sentence. No other commands  
may be available. In this case, operate the  
function via iDrive.  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
6. "Wake word"  
7. "Personal wake word"  
8. "Set wake word"  
9. Select the desired setting.  
Button on the steering wheel  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel briefly.  
Activation word from third-party providers  
2. Say the command.  
Activation word  
General information  
Depending on the national-market version,  
some third-party providers provide digital voice  
assistants, e.g. Amazon Alexa.  
Supported voice assistants can be used with  
a connected smartphone in the vehicle. In ad-  
dition to the preset or personal activation word,  
Speaking the activation word ›Hello BMW‹ or  
the personal activation word will start the sys-  
tem.  
51  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
the activation word from connected third-party  
providers can be used.  
Communication  
For example, when a mobile phone is con-  
nected, calls can be started or SMS can be  
sent.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
▷
▷
▷
›Call John Doe on cell phone.‹  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
›Dial the number 1 8 0 0 8 3 1 1 1 1 7.‹  
›New text message to John Doe: I'll be right  
there.‹  
6. "Third-party providers"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Entertainment  
▷
▷
›Play Blue Suede Shoes by Elvis Presley‹  
›Next title.‹  
Canceling voice control  
▷
Press the button on the steering  
wheel again.  
Climate control  
▷
▷
›Turn off the air conditioning.‹  
›I'm cold.‹  
▷
▷
▷
›Cancel‹  
Tilt the Controller to the right or left.  
Press the Controller.  
Windows and light  
▷
▷
›Open the windows automatically.‹  
Possible commands  
›Delete activation point for automatic power  
window.‹  
General information  
Most contents on the control display can be  
spoken as commands, e.g. menu items or list  
entries. Say list entries as shown.  
▷
›Ambient lighting.‹  
Owner's Manual via voice operation  
You can ask simple questions about vehicle  
functions and the operation of the vehicle.  
Instructions can be issued or questions can be  
asked where the Personal Assistant provides  
support.  
The voice activation system and the feed-  
back it provides do not replace the printed or  
Integrated Owner's Manual. The speech rec-  
ognition and quality of the feedback may vary.  
Function examples  
›How can the passenger airbag be  
deactivated‹  
Vehicle status and vehicle information  
▷
▷
▷
›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹  
›Show me the sport displays.‹  
›Open Owner's Manual.‹  
The Personal Assistant returns feedback.  
When stationary, the section of the integrated  
Owner's Manual is displayed on the control  
display.  
Navigation  
▷
›Drive me to 300 Chestnut Ridge Road,  
Woodcliff Lake in New Jersey.‹  
▷
▷
›Take me home.‹  
›Are there any traffic messages?‹  
52  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Menu items  
canceled, for instance due to background noise  
or conversations in the vehicle.  
The commands of the menu items are spoken  
just as they are selected via the Controller.  
1. "CAR"  
1. Activate the voice control system.  
2. ›MEDIA‹  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
3. ›Presets‹  
The stored stations are displayed on the con-  
trol display.  
6. "Speaking during voice output"  
Help for voice control  
speech processing  
▷
›Voice commands‹: to have the available  
spoken commands announced.  
speech processing improves the quality  
of the speech recognition and search results  
for points of interest. To use the functions,  
data is transmitted to a service provider via an  
encrypted connection and stored locally there.  
▷
›General information on voice control‹: have  
information on the operating principle of the  
voice control announced.  
▷
›Help‹: have help for the current menu read  
out loud.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
Settings  
Setting the voice control  
You can set the system to use standard dialog  
or a short version.  
6. "speech processing"  
The short version of the voice control plays  
back short messages in abbreviated form.  
Adjusting the volume  
Turn the volume button during the voice guid-  
ance until the desired volume is set.  
1. "CAR"  
The volume remains constant even if the vol-  
ume of other audio sources is changed.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"  
5. "Voice control"  
Using the voice activation of the  
smartphone  
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-  
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice  
control.  
6. "Response length"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Speaking during voice output  
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the  
voice activation system. The function can be  
deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably  
The device must be connected via Apple Car-  
Play or Android Auto.  
1.  
Press and hold the button on the  
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.  
53  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The voice activation of the smartphone is  
activated.  
Automating routines  
General information  
2.  
Release the button.  
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,  
for instance the automatic activation of the  
seat heating from a specific outside tempera-  
ture. Rules are created for this purpose, which  
can be activated and deactivated at any time.  
If activation is successful, a confirmation  
appears on the control display.  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration  
Principle  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "APPS"  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-  
pending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version. Alexa is a digital assistant  
from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integra-  
tion, Alexa can be used in the vehicle. For  
safety reasons, the use of some Alexa func-  
tions may be restricted while driving your vehi-  
cle.  
2. "Installed apps"  
3. "Personal assistant"  
4. "Automate habits"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Caring Car  
Functional requirement  
Principle  
▷
A driver profile is activated.  
Different vehicle functions in the car's interior  
are harmonized for the driver in a short-term  
program.  
▷
An active Amazon account must exist.  
Activating Amazon Alexa Car  
Integration  
General information  
By selecting a program, the interior lighting,  
climate control and music selection will be ad-  
justed. A program takes 3 minutes.  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in  
the My BMW app and in the vehicle.  
Follow the instructions from the Amazon Alexa  
app to set it up in the vehicle.  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "CAR"  
1. "APPS"  
2. "Installed apps"  
3. "Amazon Alexa"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
2. "Caring Car"  
3. Select the desired program.  
The program can be stopped prematurely:  
"End program"  
After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the  
vehicle as follows:  
Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-  
sired command.  
Adjusting a program  
1. "CAR"  
Information about the active function is dis-  
played on the control display. If the function  
is restricted, reconnect Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as  
necessary.  
2. "Caring Car"  
3. Select the desired program.  
4. "Music settings"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
54  
 
iDrive  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
▷
The Personal Assistant provides informa-  
tion about vehicle functions that may not be  
installed in the vehicle.  
This also applies to safety functions and  
systems.  
▷
▷
Certain noises can be detected and may  
lead to problems. Keep the doors, windows  
and convertible top closed.  
Noises from the front passenger or occu-  
pants can impair the system. Avoid making  
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.  
▷
▷
Major language dialects can cause prob-  
lems with the speech recognition feature.  
A poor data connection influences the re-  
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and  
the Search.  
55  
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Functional requirement  
▷
Active ConnectedDrive contract.  
▷
The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has  
been activated.  
▷
▷
Cellular network reception.  
BMW Remote Software  
Upgrade  
Consent to transmit the corresponding data  
was given in the Data Protection menu.  
Additional information:  
Principle  
Data protection, refer to page 64.  
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-  
date the entire software of the vehicle. This  
makes new functions, functional enhance-  
ments or quality improvements available.  
Search for an upgrade  
Functional requirement  
Standby must be turned on to search for a  
software upgrade.  
General information  
BMW recommends performing the Remote  
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes  
available.  
Automatic search  
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in  
the background.  
Safety information  
Manual search  
1. "CAR"  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Search for upgrades"  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
56  
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
completed, the information about the version  
can be displayed on the control display.  
Download of an upgrade  
Automatic download  
The available data for Remote Software Up-  
grade is automatically loaded into the vehicle.  
No download consent is required.  
This information is also available in the Con-  
nectedDrive customer portal.  
Displaying information  
Display in the vehicle:  
Via BMW app  
If an upgrade is available, information about  
the new software version is displayed in the  
BMW app.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Info about version"  
The data for the upgrade can then be down-  
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an  
existing WLAN connection.  
Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:  
 
The data can then be transmitted from the  
mobile device to the vehicle.  
This transmission method accelerates the  
download of the data, for instance in areas  
with limited mobile network availability.  
Installing the upgrade  
General information  
1. Download the upgrade in the BMW app to  
the smartphone.  
▷
▷
▷
The installation of the upgrade may result  
in a deletion of software changes, e.g.,  
increases in performance that have been  
made by parties other than the manufac-  
turer of the vehicle.  
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW app.  
3. Establish connection to the vehicle.  
▷
▷
iOS: Connect Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.  
Android: connect WLAN.  
Modifications to the electrical system of the  
vehicle, for instance to control units, that  
have not been made by the vehicle manu-  
facturer can lead to an interruption of the  
installation.  
The data transfer of the upgrade from the  
mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the  
background only while driving.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
The installation may take approx. 20 mi-  
nutes.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
The installation cannot be terminated.  
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle, refer  
to page 70.  
The vehicle cannot be used during the in-  
stallation.  
▷
▷
The vehicle can be exited during the instal-  
lation.  
Information about the version  
The installation does not occur until the  
consent was given.  
General information  
The information about the version contains a  
description of the updates included in the Re-  
mote Software Upgrade. During the download  
and after the installation has been successfully  
57  
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
Prerequisites for the installation  
Starting installation  
▷
The battery is sufficiently charged.  
The upgrade can be installed when all prereq-  
uisites have been met.  
▷
The outside temperature is above  
14 ℉/-10 ℃.  
1. "CAR"  
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-  
tion.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Start upgrade now"  
▷
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is turned off.  
The selector lever position P is engaged.  
The engine is turned off and sufficiently  
cooled down.  
Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
▷
Automatic engine start for pre-conditioning  
is not activated via iDrive.  
Functional limitations  
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is  
temporarily unavailable, for instance:  
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-  
requisites on the control display.  
If the prerequisites are not met such as a suffi-  
ciently charged battery, the upgrade will not be  
offered for installation.  
▷
▷
Hazard warning system.  
Central locking system and, if necessary,  
Comfort Access.  
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,  
after longer trips.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking lights.  
Horn.  
Preparing the vehicle  
▷
Alarm system.  
Park the vehicle safely away from the public  
road.  
Emergency call.  
Power windows.  
Operation of the trunk lid.  
Checking the fuel filler flap lock.  
▷
Cellular network reception must be ensured  
so that a fault message can be sent, for  
instance if the installation is terminated.  
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked  
from the outside using the integrated key.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Close the convertible top.  
Close the windows.  
Close the trunk.  
After successful upgrade  
The vehicle can be used again immediately.  
Remove energy consuming devices such as  
a mobile phone.  
Booked services such as Advanced Real Time  
Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-  
tomatically reactivated during the next trip.  
▷
The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-  
cle for the consent for installation.  
▷
▷
Switch off the exterior lighting.  
After an extended stationary period, charge  
the vehicle battery with an extended drive.  
Remove the devices connected to the diag-  
nostic socket.  
Malfunction  
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-  
structions on the control display or in the BMW  
app.  
58  
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact  
an authorized service center or another quali-  
fied service center or repair shop.  
Validity of the Owner's Manual  
Production of the vehicle  
At the time of production at the plant, the  
printed Owner's Manual is the most current  
resource.  
After a software update in the vehicle  
After a vehicle software update such as via Re-  
mote Software Upgrade the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the lat-  
est information.  
59  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
General settings  
Setting the time format  
1. "CAR"  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Time format:"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Automatic time setting  
Depending on the vehicle's optional features,  
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone  
are updated automatically.  
Time  
Setting the time zone  
1. "CAR"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Automatic time setting"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Time zone:"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Date  
Setting the time  
1. "CAR"  
Setting the date  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Time:"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Date:"  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours  
are displayed.  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is  
displayed.  
7. Press the Controller.  
7. Press the Controller.  
8. Make the settings for the month and year.  
9. "OK"  
8. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-  
nutes are displayed.  
9. "OK"  
60  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
Setting the date format  
1. "CAR"  
Resetting trip data  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. "Date format:"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Reset trip data"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Speed warning  
Language  
Principle  
Setting the system language  
1. "CAR"  
The speed warning can be used to set a speed  
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed  
limit is exceeded.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Language"  
General information  
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed  
exceeds the set speed limit again after drop-  
ping below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Setting the units of  
measurement  
Adjusting  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Depending on the national-market version, you  
can set the units of measurement for some  
values, for instance consumption, distances,  
and temperature.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Speed warning"  
5. "Warning above:"  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed  
is displayed.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
7. Press the Controller.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Units"  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "CAR"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
2. "Settings"  
Trip data settings  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Speed warning"  
5. "Speed warning"  
Principle  
The intervals in which the trip data will be reset  
can be configured.  
61  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
Applying current speed as the  
speed warning  
1. "CAR"  
Reset vehicle data  
All individual settings can be reset to the fac-  
tory settings when the drive-ready state is  
switched off. Data can only be deleted while  
stationary.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Speed warning"  
5. "Select current speed"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Reset vehicle data"  
5. "Reset vehicle data"  
Activating/deactivating pop-  
ups  
When the saved settings in a driver profile  
are synchronized with the ConnectedDrive ac-  
count, these settings will remain in the Con-  
nectedDrive account.  
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed  
automatically on the control display. Some of  
these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Notifications  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Pop-ups"  
Principle  
5. Select the desired setting.  
The menu centrally displays all notifications ar-  
riving in the vehicle in form of a list.  
Control display  
General information  
The following notifications can be displayed:  
Brightness  
1. "CAR"  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Traffic messages.  
Check Control messages.  
Messages on service notifications.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
Communication messages, for example e-  
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.  
4. "Control display"  
5. "Brightness at night"  
6. Press the Controller.  
▷
▷
Messages, for instance from the BMW app.  
Messages from the manufacturer of the ve-  
hicle, for instance technical information or  
important customer information.  
7. Turn the Controller until the desired bright-  
ness is set.  
8. Press the Controller.  
The number of notifications is additionally dis-  
played in the status field.  
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-  
ness control may not be clearly visible.  
62  
 
General settings  
CONTROLS  
Go to notifications  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Notifications"  
Condition  
Description  
"Do not  
disturb"  
Incoming calls and non-criti-  
cal notifications are not dis-  
played.  
3. Select desired notification.  
Icon is shown in the  
status information with the  
number of messages.  
Delete notifications  
Notifications can be deleted from the list.  
"Passenger  
on board"  
Private contents such as  
messages will not be dis-  
played directly.  
Sustained Check Control messages or mes-  
sages from the vehicle manufacturer with im-  
portant customer information are displayed as  
long as they are relevant.  
Icon is shown in the  
status information with the  
number of messages.  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Notifications"  
3. Select desired notifications.  
Activate/deactivate  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Notifications"  
4.  
Press the button.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Notification display"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Settings  
It is possible to set which notifications are per-  
mitted and which notifications will be displayed  
at the start of the trip or upon completion of  
the trip.  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
2. "Notifications"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Display, notifications  
General information  
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistants al-  
lows the configuration of the range of mes-  
sages that will be displayed. Depending on  
the situation, the desired condition can be acti-  
vated.  
63  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Personal settings  
Deleting personal data in the vehicle  
Vehicle features and options  
Principle  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores  
personal data such as stored radio stations.  
This personal data can be permanently de-  
leted using iDrive.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
data is deleted:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Driver profile settings.  
Data protection  
Stored radio stations.  
Stored programmable memory buttons.  
Data transfer  
Trip computer and on-board computer in-  
formation.  
Principle  
▷
Navigation, for instance stored destina-  
tions.  
The vehicle offers different services, whose  
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-  
ice provider.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Phone book.  
, e.g., favorites, cookies.  
Office data, for instance voice memos.  
Login accounts.  
General information  
The data transfer can be deactivated for some  
services. When the data transfer is deacti-  
vated, the respective service cannot be used.  
Linking vehicle and ConnectedDrive ac-  
count.  
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up  
to 15 minutes.  
Settings  
The data transfer can be configured in different  
stages or individually for separate services.  
Functional requirement  
Data can only be deleted while stationary.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Deleting data  
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted  
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-  
tings.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Additional information:  
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 62.  
64  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
This option is offered in new vehicle for a  
limited period of time.  
Driver profiles  
As soon as the engine is started or any button  
is pressed, the Welcome screen will be hidden.  
Principle  
Driver profiles can be created to store personal  
vehicle settings. If the vehicle is used by multi-  
ple drivers, each driver can create his personal  
driver profile. When a driver profile is selected,  
the vehicle will automatically apply the stored  
settings in the driver profile.  
Setup assistant  
The setup assistant is offered in new vehicles  
for a limited period of time on the Welcome  
screen to configure the most important set-  
tings for the vehicle.  
"Getting started" Select to start the set-up as-  
sistant.  
General information  
Three personal driver profiles can be created.  
The set-up assistant can be started via iDrive  
at any time.  
In addition, a guest profile is available that can  
be selected by any driver. The guest profile is  
active when a personal driver profile has not  
been selected.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Changes to the vehicle settings are automati-  
cally stored in the active driver profile or in the  
guest profile.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Getting started"  
The driver is guided step by step through the  
following functions:  
The vehicle can already adjust to the driver  
when it is unlocked. For this purpose, the rec-  
ognition via a vehicle key or a digital key must  
be assigned to a driver profile.  
▷
▷
Setting the system language.  
ConnectedDrive countries:  
ConnectedDrive countries:The settings stored  
in the driver profile can be synchronized with  
the personal BMW ConnectedDrive account.  
It is thereby possible to use these settings in  
other BMW vehicles as well.  
If the set-up assistant was opened in the  
guest profile: create driver profile.  
▷
▷
Pairing mobile devices with the vehicle.  
If the set-up assistant was opened from  
an already defined driver profile: set up per-  
sonal assistant.  
Functional requirements  
When a driver profile is created, switched or  
deleted, the vehicle must move at a maximum  
of walking speed.  
▷
Depending on whether the set-up assistant  
was opened from an already defined driver  
profile or a guest profile: set up services  
or confirm the explanation for the transmis-  
sion of vehicle related data.  
Welcome screen  
After the control display is switched on, the  
Welcome screen will be displayed.  
▷
Set up other methods for use.  
The selected settings are stored in the active  
driver profile.  
The following actions can be carried out on the  
Welcome screen:  
Guest profile  
The guest profile can be activated by any  
driver. Vehicle settings that are entered when  
▷
▷
Switch the driver profile.  
Starting the set-up assistant.  
65  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
the guest profile is active will be stored in the  
guest profile.  
ConnectedDrive countries:An existing Con-  
nectedDrive account must be assigned to  
a driver profile. The following options are  
available for this purpose:  
In the following cases the guest profile is auto-  
matically active:  
▷
"Via My BMW App"  
▷
▷
A driver profile has not been created yet.  
Scanning the displayed QR code will ac-  
cept the access data for the Connected-  
Drive account from the BMW app.  
No driver profile has been assigned to the  
vehicle key that was used to unlock the ve-  
hicle.  
▷
▷
"Log in"  
▷
No driver profile has been assigned to the  
digital key that was used to unlock the vehi-  
cle.  
The access data must be entered via  
iDrive.  
The following limitations apply:  
"New registration"  
▷
▷
The guest profile cannot be renamed.  
Scan the displayed QR code and follow  
the instructions on the smartphone.  
It is not possible to assign the recognition  
to the guest profile.  
5. If the vehicle is in the guest profile:  
"Transfer current settings"  
▷
▷
It is not possible to assign a PIN to the  
guest profile.  
The settings of the guest profile are ap-  
plied.  
ConnectedDrive countries:It is not possible  
to synchronize with a ConnectedDrive ac-  
count.  
6. ConnectedDrive countries:  
"Synchronize driver profile"  
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome  
screen or via iDrive:  
Future changes to the settings are  
synchronized with the BMW Cloud.  
1. "CAR"  
Selecting recognition  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the pro-  
file image can be tapped in the top status  
bar.  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
3. "Guest"  
4. "OK"  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
4. "Driver recognition"  
Creating a driver profile  
1. "CAR"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"with vehicle key"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
The vehicle key that is recognized in  
the vehicle interior is assigned to the  
driver profile. If multiple vehicle keys are  
detected, the unintended vehicle keys  
must be removed from the vehicle inte-  
rior.  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
4. "Add driver profile"  
Non-ConnectedDrive countries:A name  
must be entered for the driver profile.  
▷
"With Digital Key"  
66  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
The digital key that is recognized in the  
vehicle interior is assigned to the driver  
profile. If multiple digital keys are de-  
tected, the unintended digital keys must  
be removed from the vehicle interior.  
If no driver profile is assigned to this key,  
the guest profile is activated.  
Setting up a PIN  
A driver profile with recognition cannot be ac-  
tivated without vehicle key and without digital  
key. In this case, a PIN can be set up to acti-  
vate the driver profile.  
6. "Activate linkage"  
If the vehicle key or the smartphone with the  
digital key is not carried with you or not recog-  
nized, the driver profile can only be selected on  
the Welcome screen when a PIN has been set  
up.  
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is not avail-  
able:If a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not  
known, the driver profile cannot be activated.  
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is availa-  
ble:If a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not  
known, the driver profile can be activated with  
the access data of the corresponding Connect-  
edDrive account.  
Automatic recognition  
If recognition has been defined, automatic acti-  
vation of the driver profile is triggered by the  
following activities:  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using the button  
on the assigned vehicle key.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle with a door handle.  
The assigned vehicle key or the assigned  
Digital Key must be carried with you.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
▷
By automatic unlocking when approaching  
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the  
assigned Digital Key must be carried with  
you. Depending on the country, it may not  
be possible to recognize the Digital Key.  
4. "Driver recognition"  
5. "using PIN"  
Changing/canceling the recognition  
function  
When another vehicle key or another digital  
key is assigned to a driver profile, the current  
assignment must be canceled first.  
If there are several vehicle keys or Digital Keys  
in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the  
driver profile is done according to the following  
priority:  
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers  
activation of the assigned driver profile.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
If the vehicle is unlocked using an unas-  
signed key, the guest profile is activated.  
▷
▷
If a vehicle key and a Digital Key are de-  
tected at the same time, the Digital Key  
triggers the activation of the assigned driver  
profile.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
4. "Driver recognition"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
If another key is detected on the driver’s  
door after activation of the driver profile, the  
driver profile of the last key detected is acti-  
vated.  
▷
▷
"with vehicle key"  
"With Digital Key"  
6. "Activate linkage"  
67  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
When the vehicle and vehicle key will be  
handed over such as for maintenance, carry  
out the following steps first:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seat and climate control function.  
Exterior lights.  
Vehicle access.  
▷
▷
▷
Setting up PIN.  
Head-up display.  
Canceling recognition using the vehicle key.  
Switching to the guest profile.  
Main menu layout.  
The synchronization with the ConnectedDrive  
account is enabled when a driver profile is cre-  
ated or via iDrive:  
The handed over vehicle key can then no lon-  
ger be used to access the personal driver pro-  
file.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
Selecting a driver profile  
Depending on the recognition setting, the  
driver profile will be selected automatically.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
If the guest profile is active, the driver profile  
will be selected on the Welcome screen or via  
iDrive. A PIN may have to be entered.  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Synchronize driver profile"  
6. "Synchronize driver profile"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
Renaming a driver profile  
Non-ConnectedDrive countries:  
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the pro-  
file image can be tapped in the top status  
bar.  
1. "CAR"  
3. Select driver profile.  
4. "OK"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the pro-  
file image can be tapped in the top status  
bar.  
All settings stored in the selected driver profile  
are automatically applied.  
3. Select driver profile.  
4. "Settings"  
Switching synchronization with the  
ConnectedDrive account on/off  
Some of the settings saved to a driver pro-  
file are synchronized with the personal Con-  
nectedDrive account. This enables the use of  
these personal settings in other BMW vehicles  
with ConnectedDrive access, provided that this  
function is supported.  
5. Enter a profile name.  
6.  
Select the icon.  
ConnectedDrive countries:  
The name of the driver profile is transferred  
from the ConnectedDrive account. Changes for  
the profile name must be made in the Con-  
nectedDrive account.  
The following settings are synchronized with  
the ConnectedDrive account:  
Selecting a profile picture  
1. "CAR"  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Navigation.  
Data protection.  
Driver profile and driver assistance.  
Language.  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
68  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
The use of personal settings that are stored in  
the ConnectedDrive account in other vehicles  
is subject to technical limitations. For example,  
settings may be stored for a system that is  
not available, or available in a non-compatible  
version, in other vehicles.  
4. "Avatar"  
5. Select the desired profile picture.  
ConnectedDrive countries:  
The profile image is transferred from the Con-  
nectedDrive customer portal or the BMW app.  
Deleting the driver profile  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driver profiles"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile  
image can be tapped in the top status bar.  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Remove driver profile"  
6. Select the desired driver profile.  
7. "Delete now"  
ConnectedDrive countries:If the driver profile  
was synchronized with a ConnectedDrive ac-  
count, the stored data in the ConnectedDrive  
account will be retained.  
System limits  
A clear detection of the desired vehicle key  
may not be possible in the following cases,  
e.g.:  
▷
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not  
locked and unlocked.  
▷
When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-  
tal keys with an assigned driver profile are  
located in the outer area on the driver's  
side of the vehicle.  
▷
When the vehicle was unlocked from the  
BMW app.  
ConnectedDrive countries:  
A driver profile can only be created and  
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account  
when the vehicle has cellular network recep-  
tion.  
69  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
Connections  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle  
Principle  
General information  
Various connection types are available for us-  
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec-  
tion type to select depends on the mobile de-  
vice and the desired function.  
The following overview shows possible func-  
tions and the suitable connection types for  
them. The range of functions depends on the  
mobile device.  
Function  
Connection type  
Icon in the de-  
vice list  
Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.  
tem.  
Using phone functions via iDrive or  
touchscreen.  
Other functions, e.g. Contacts or  
SMS.  
Playing music from the smartphone  
or the audio system.  
Bluetooth audio.  
WLAN in the vehicle:  
Wi-Fi.  
Wi-Fi.  
USB.  
Using apps in the vehicle.  
Wi-Fi hotspot:  
Using the vehicle Internet access.  
USB port:  
Playing music or videos from a USB  
device.  
70  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
Function  
Connection type  
Icon in the de-  
vice list  
Apple CarPlay:  
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
Using apps via iDrive and via voice  
operation.  
Android Auto:  
Using apps via iDrive and via voice  
operation.  
The following connection types require one-  
time pairing with the vehicle:  
Displaying the vehicle identification  
number and software part number  
With a search for compatible devices, you may  
have to state the vehicle identification number  
and the software part number. These numbers  
can be displayed in the vehicle.  
▷
▷
Bluetooth.  
Wi-Fi.  
Paired devices are automatically recognized  
later on and connected to the vehicle.  
1. "COM"  
Safety information  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
Warning  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
5. "Bluetooth® info"  
6. "System information"  
Managing mobile devices  
General information  
▷
After one-time pairing, the devices are  
automatically recognized and reconnected  
when standby state is switched on.  
Compatible devices  
▷
After stored content on the SIM card or the  
mobile phone such as contacts has been  
detected, the data is transmitted to the ve-  
hicle and can be used via iDrive.  
General information  
Information on compatible mobile devices is  
available as follows:  
▷
For some devices, certain settings are nec-  
essary, for instance authorization; see the  
operating instructions of the device.  
▷
▷
▷
On the BMW homepage.  
Via Hotline/Customer Support  
At an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Displaying the device list  
All devices paired with or connected to the ve-  
hicle are displayed in the device list.  
71  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
A maximum of four devices can be connected  
to the vehicle via Bluetooth®, and a maximum  
of ten devices can be connected to the vehicle  
via Wi-Fi.  
The device remains paired and can be  
connected again.  
▷
▷
"Delete device"  
The device is disconnected and re-  
moved from the device list.  
1. "COM"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
"Connection mode"  
An icon to the right of the device name indi-  
cates, for which function the device is used.  
Select a connection mode, for instance  
Apple CarPlay.  
When the icon is displayed in white, this func-  
tion is actively connected to the vehicle. The  
icon is displayed in gray when the function of  
the device is inactive.  
▷
▷
"Telephone"  
Set telephone.  
"Bluetooth® audio"  
Playback of music files on external de-  
vices such as audio devices or mobile  
phones via Bluetooth®.  
Icon Meaning  
Telephone.  
▷
▷
"Apps"  
Bluetooth audio.  
WLAN in the vehicle, Wi-Fi hotspot.  
Apps.  
With the installed BMW app, apps from  
the smartphone can be displayed in the  
vehicle.  
"Wi-Fi®"  
Apple CarPlay.  
Android Auto.  
Connects the device with the WLAN in  
the vehicle.  
Priority of the phones  
Configuring the device  
When multiple mobile phones are connected  
to the vehicle, you can specify the priority of  
the mobile phones. The mobile phone with the  
highest priority is preferred, for instance for  
outgoing calls and messages.  
Functions can be activated or deactivated for  
paired and connected devices.  
The range of functions depends on the mobile  
device.  
Observe the information on the control display.  
1. "COM"  
1. "COM"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
3. Select the desired device.  
4. Select the desired setting:  
5. "Priorities for telephones"  
6. Select the desired device.  
7. Select the desired priority by sliding.  
▷
"Connect device"  
The functions that were assigned to  
the device before disconnecting are as-  
signed to the device when it is recon-  
nected. The functions may be deacti-  
vated on a device already connected.  
▷
"Disconnect device"  
72  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
Frequently Asked Questions  
Bluetooth connection  
All prerequisites are met and all required steps  
were completed in the specified order. Despite  
that, the mobile device does not function as  
expected.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Compatible device with Bluetooth interface.  
Compatible devices, refer to page 71.  
The vehicle key is in the vehicle.  
In this case, the following explanations can  
help:  
▷
▷
▷
The device is ready for operation.  
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or  
connected?  
Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle and  
on the device.  
▷
There are too many Bluetooth devices con-  
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.  
▷
▷
The pairing readiness is displayed on the  
control display.  
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections  
with other devices.  
Bluetooth default settings such as for visi-  
bility may be required on device, refer to  
your device operating instructions.  
Delete the Bluetooth connection from the  
device list on the mobile phone and start a  
new device search.  
Activate Bluetooth  
1. "COM"  
Too many Bluetooth devices are paired  
with the same function. Adapt the functions  
in the device list on the control display.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
▷
The mobile phone is in power-save mode  
or has only a limited remaining battery life.  
Charge the mobile phone and deactivate  
the power-save mode where required.  
5. "Bluetooth®"  
6. Select setting.  
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?  
▷
The applications on the mobile phone do  
not function anymore.  
Connecting the device  
1. "COM"  
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
▷
Too high or too low ambient temperature  
for mobile phone operation.  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-  
treme ambient temperatures.  
5. "Phone calls and audio"  
Why can telephone functions not be used via  
iDrive?  
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed  
on the control display.  
▷
Phone functions are not configured for the  
mobile phone.  
6. Compare the control number displayed on  
the control display with the control number  
on the display of the mobile device, and  
confirm that the two match.  
Connect the mobile phone with the tele-  
phone function.  
7. A Bluetooth connection is established.  
Why are no or not all telephone book entries  
displayed or why are they incomplete?  
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle  
and displayed in the device list.  
73  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Transmission of the telephone book entries  
is not yet complete.  
WLAN connection  
It is possible that only the telephone book  
entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card  
are transmitted.  
General information  
For certain applications such as apps, the data  
exchange between smartphone and vehicle  
occurs via WLAN.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
It may not be possible to display telephone  
book entries with special characters.  
It may not be possible to transmit contacts  
from social networks.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
The number of phone book entries to be  
transmitted is too high.  
▷
Compatible device with activated WLAN in-  
terface.  
Data volume of the contact too large, for  
instance due to stored information such as  
memos.  
Activate WLAN in the vehicle  
1. "COM"  
Reduce the data volume of the contact.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
▷
▷
The mobile phone has only been connected  
as an audio source.  
Configure the mobile phone and connect it  
with the telephone function.  
5. "Wi-Fi®"  
Contact was created in the contact list of  
the phone after the last synchronization.  
Wi-Fi hotspot  
Synchronize contacts again: "Reload  
contacts"  
Principle  
How can the telephone connection quality be  
improved?  
Compatible devices with WLAN interface can  
use the Internet connection of the vehicle via  
the Wi-Fi hotspot.  
▷
Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal  
on the mobile phone, depending on the  
mobile phone.  
General information  
Up to ten devices can be connected to the Wi-  
Fi hotspot simultaneously.  
▷
▷
Insert the mobile phone into the wireless  
charging tray.  
Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa-  
rately in the sound settings.  
Functional requirements  
If all points listed have been checked and the  
required function is still not available: contact  
the hotline, an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
▷
Compatible device with activated WLAN in-  
terface.  
Compatible devices, refer to page 71.  
WLAN is activated on the vehicle.  
Internet use is activated for the vehicle.  
▷
▷
▷
Registration and data contract with a serv-  
ice provider where required.  
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
74  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
Connecting a device to the Internet  
via the Wi-Fi hotspot  
Using the Internet for the first time via the Wi-  
Fi hotspot requires registration and possibly a  
data volume purchase from a service provider.  
Deactivating Internet usage via the  
Wi-Fi hotspot  
Internet usage may be deactivated if the data  
volume is used up, for instance.  
1. "COM"  
Depending on the national-market version,  
data volume can be purchased via the con-  
nected mobile communication device or from  
the ConnectedDrive Store.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Wi-Fi hotspot"  
1. "COM"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
Apple CarPlay©  
5. "Internet, apps"  
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis-  
played on the control display.  
Principle  
CarPlay allows select functions of a compatible  
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice control  
and iDrive.  
6. Activate Internet usage via WLAN if neces-  
sary.  
"Open settings"  
Functional requirements  
7. Activate Internet usage.  
"Wi-Fi hotspot"  
▷
Compatible iPhone: iPhone 5 or later with  
iOS 9.3 or later.  
8. Tilt the Controller to the left.  
Compatible devices, refer to page 71.  
Corresponding mobile contract.  
9. Search for WLAN networks on the mobile  
device. Select network name on the device.  
▷
▷
Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and Siri voice control are  
activated on the iPhone.  
10. Enter hotspot code on the device and con-  
nect.  
▷
▷
If necessary, the setting for mobile data  
must be activated on the iPhone.  
The device is displayed in the device list.  
Additionally, a QR code will be displayed on  
the control display. Alternatively, this QR code  
can be used to pair the mobile device with the  
hotspot.  
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are enabled in the ve-  
hicle.  
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay  
1. "COM"  
All devices connected via the hotspot use this  
data volume.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
5. "Phone calls and audio"  
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed  
on the control display.  
75  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
6. On the mobile device, search for nearby  
Bluetooth devices and select the vehicle.  
Android Auto©  
A control number is displayed.  
Principle  
7. Compare the control number displayed on  
the control display with the control number  
on the display of the mobile device, and  
confirm that the two match.  
Android Auto allows select functions of a com-  
patible smartphone to be operated via Goo-  
gle Assistant voice control and via iDrive.  
8. "Use Apple CarPlay"  
General information  
The range of services offered depends on the  
country.  
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and  
displayed in the device list.  
Operation  
For more information, refer to the Integrated  
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Compatible Android smartphone: Samsung  
or Google smartphone with Android 10 or  
an Android smartphone with Android 11, re-  
gardless of the manufacturer.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
▷
▷
▷
Compatible devices, refer to page 71.  
Corresponding mobile contract.  
All prerequisites are met and all required steps  
were completed in the specified order. Despite  
that, the mobile device does not function as  
expected.  
Bluetooth and WLAN are enabled on the  
smartphone.  
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone must support a Wi-Fi con-  
nection with 5 GHz.  
In this case, the following explanations can  
help:  
If necessary, the setting for mobile data  
must be activated on the smartphone.  
The iPhone has already been paired with  
Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is set  
up, CarPlay can no longer be selected.  
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are enabled in the ve-  
hicle.  
▷
Delete the iPhone concerned from the de-  
vice list.  
Pairing a smartphone with Android  
Auto  
1. "COM"  
▷
On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con-  
cerned from the list of stored connections  
under Bluetooth and under WLAN.  
▷
Pair the iPhone as a new device.  
2. "Mobile devices"  
If the steps listed have been carried out and  
the required function is still not available: con-  
tact the hotline, an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or repair shop.  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. "New device"  
5. "Phone calls and audio"  
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed  
on the control display.  
6. On the mobile device, search for nearby  
Bluetooth devices and select the vehicle.  
A control number is displayed.  
76  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
7. Compare the control number displayed on  
the control display with the control number  
on the display of the mobile device, and  
confirm that the two match.  
▷
Mobile phones.  
▷
▷
Audio devices such as MP3 players.  
USB storage devices.  
Common file systems are supported. FAT32  
and exFAT are the recommended formats.  
8. "Use Android Auto"  
9. If necessary, finish the setup on the mobile  
device.  
A connected USB device will be supplied with  
charge current via the USB port if the device  
supports this. Follow the maximum charge  
current of the USB port.  
The smartphone is connected to the vehicle  
and displayed in the device list.  
The following uses are possible on USB ports  
with data transfer:  
Operation  
For more information, refer to the Integrated  
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.  
▷
▷
Playing music files.  
Playing videos.  
Follow the following when connecting:  
Frequently Asked Questions  
▷
Do not use force when plugging the con-  
nector into the USB port.  
All prerequisites are met and all required steps  
were completed in the specified order. Despite  
that, the mobile device does not function as  
expected.  
▷
▷
Use a flexible adapter cable.  
Protect the USB device against mechanical  
damage.  
In this case, the following explanations can  
help:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Due to the large number of USB devices  
available on the market, it cannot be guar-  
anteed that every device is operable on the  
vehicle.  
The smartphone has already been paired with  
Android Auto. When a new connection is set  
up, Android Auto can no longer be selected.  
Do not expose USB devices to extreme en-  
vironmental conditions such as very high  
temperatures, refer to the operating in-  
structions of the device.  
▷
Delete the smartphone concerned from the  
device list.  
▷
On the smartphone, delete the vehicle con-  
cerned from the list of stored connections  
under Bluetooth and under WLAN.  
Due to the many different compression  
techniques, proper playback of the media  
stored on the USB device cannot be guar-  
anteed in all cases.  
▷
Pair the smartphone as a new device.  
If the steps listed have been carried out and  
the required function is still not available: con-  
tact the hotline, an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or repair shop.  
To ensure proper transmission of the  
stored data, do not charge a USB device  
via the onboard socket, when it is con-  
nected to the USB port.  
Depending on how the USB device is be-  
ing used, settings may be required on the  
USB storage device, refer to the operating  
instructions of the device.  
USB connection  
General information  
The following mobile devices can be con-  
nected to the USB port:  
Not compatible USB devices:  
77  
 
Connections  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
USB hard drives.  
USB hubs.  
USB memory card readers with multiple  
slots.  
▷
▷
HFS-formatted USB devices.  
Devices such as fans or bulbs.  
Functional requirement  
Compatible device with USB port.  
Additional information:  
Compatible devices, refer to page 71.  
Connecting the device  
Connect the USB device using a suitable  
adapter cable to a USB port.  
The USB device is displayed in the device list.  
Additional information:  
USB port, refer to page 245.  
78  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key  
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-  
diately seek medical help if there is any sus-  
picion that a battery or button cell battery has  
been swallowed or is located in any part of  
the body.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Warning  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
Vehicle key  
General information  
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of  
delivery, each containing an integrated key.  
Warning  
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-  
tery.  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings are possible  
for the button functions.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
A driver profile with personal settings can be  
assigned to a vehicle key.  
To provide information on maintenance rec-  
ommendations, the service data is stored in  
the vehicle key.  
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle  
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting  
the vehicle.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.  
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-  
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries  
within two hours, for example due to internal  
Releasing the parking brake.  
79  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
Unlocking the vehicle  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have  
been unlocked due to the settings, press the  
button on the vehicle key again to unlock the  
other vehicle access points.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
In addition, the following functions are exe-  
cuted:  
▷
If a driver profile has been assigned to the  
vehicle key, this driver profile will be acti-  
vated and the settings that are saved in it  
will be applied.  
Overview  
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off.  
Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.  
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the  
button in the vehicle interior, they will not  
be folded out during unlocking.  
▷
With alarm system: The alarm system will  
be switched off.  
1
Unlocking  
2
Locking  
The lighting functions may depend on the am-  
bient brightness.  
Pre-conditioning 238  
Unlocking the trunk lid  
Panic mode, pathway lighting  
3
4
Convenient opening  
Safety information  
Unlocking  
General information  
Warning  
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking  
using the vehicle key depends on the following  
settings:  
Body parts can be jammed when opening  
and closing the convertible top. There is a  
risk of injury. When opening and closing the  
convertible top, observe the movement and  
keep the travel path clear.  
▷
If only the driver's door and the fuel filler  
flap or all access to the vehicle will be un-  
locked when the button is pressed for the  
first time.  
Opening  
▷
▷
If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key.  
If the welcome light is switched on when  
the vehicle is being unlocked.  
The windows open for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
Welcome lights, refer to page 164.  
80  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
With Comfort Access:  
With Comfort Access: convenient  
closing  
In close range to the vehicle, the convertible  
top is also opened.  
Safety information  
Press and hold the button of the vehi-  
cle key until the convertible top is fully  
opened. Leaving the close range of  
the vehicle stops the motion.  
Warning  
With convenient closing, body parts can be  
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure  
that the area of movement of the doors is  
clear during convenient closing.  
Locking  
General information  
The behavior of the vehicle during locking us-  
ing the vehicle key depends on the following  
settings:  
Closing  
Press and hold the button on the vehicle  
key after locking.  
▷
If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
The windows and the convertible top are  
closed in close range to the vehicle, as long  
as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.  
▷
If the exterior mirrors are automatically  
folded in when the vehicle is locked. The  
exterior mirrors are not folded in when the  
hazard warning flashers are switched on.  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key until the convertible top is fully  
closed. Leaving the close range of the  
vehicle stops the motion.  
▷
If pathway lighting is activated during lock-  
ing.  
The exterior mirrors are folded in.  
Locking the vehicle  
The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the  
hazard warning flashers are switched on.  
1. Close the driver's door.  
2.  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
Switching on the interior and  
exterior lighting  
The following functions are executed:  
▷
All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap  
are locked.  
Press the button on the vehicle key with  
the vehicle locked.  
▷
With alarm system: The alarm system will  
be switched on.  
The function is not available for the first 10 sec-  
onds after locking.  
If the drive-ready state is still turned on when  
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk  
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must  
be switched off by means of the Start/Stop  
button.  
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off.  
Interior lights, refer to page 167.  
▷
Depending on the settings, parts of the ex-  
terior lighting will be switched on.  
The lighting functions may depend on the am-  
bient brightness.  
81  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Pathway lighting, refer to page 164.  
Trunk lid  
Replacing the battery  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
NOTICE  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
country version, it is possible to specify  
whether the trunk lid can be unlocked with the  
vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will re-  
spond to this.  
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-  
vice can damage the device. There is a risk  
of damage to property. Always replace the  
discharged battery with a battery with the  
same voltage, the same size and the same  
specification.  
With automatic transmission: selector lever po-  
sition P must be engaged to open the trunk lid  
with the vehicle key.  
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle  
key.  
Safety information  
Integrated key, refer to page 89.  
2. Place the integrated key underneath the  
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and  
lift the lid with a lever movement of the  
integrated key, arrow 2.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is  
clear while opening and closing.  
Warning  
While opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-  
age to property. Make sure that the travel  
path of the trunk lid is clear while opening  
and closing.  
3. Push battery in arrow direction using a  
pointed object and lift it out.  
Unlocking  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key for approx. 1 second.  
Switching pathway lighting on  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key for approx. 1 second.  
4. Insert a type CR 2032 3 V battery with the  
positive side facing up.  
It is possible to adjust the duration of the path-  
way lighting feature.  
Additional information:  
82  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
5. Press the lid closed.  
▷
▷
Fault of radio transmission by a charging  
process of mobile devices, for instance  
charging of a mobile phone.  
6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key  
until the integrated key engages.  
The vehicle key is located in direct proximity  
of the wireless charging tray.  
Have old batteries disposed of by an  
authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop,  
or take them to a collection point.  
Place the vehicle key in a different location.  
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also  
be unlocked and locked from the outside with  
the integrated key.  
Additional vehicle keys  
Additional vehicle keys are available from an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Integrated key, refer to page 89.  
Switching the drive-ready state on via  
emergency detection of the vehicle key  
Loss of vehicle keys  
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned driver  
profile, the connection to this vehicle key must  
be deleted. A new vehicle key can then be as-  
signed to the driver profile.  
Malfunction  
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready  
state if the vehicle key has not been detected.  
General information  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Proceed as follows in this case:  
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
1. Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the  
mark on the steering column. Pay attention  
to the display in the instrument cluster.  
▷
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.  
2. If the vehicle key is detected:  
Fault of the radio link from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-  
onds.  
▷
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal  
objects.  
If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly  
change the position of the vehicle key and re-  
peat the procedure.  
Do not transport the vehicle key together  
with metal objects.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
What precautions can be taken to be able to  
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in  
the vehicle key?  
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones  
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-  
ity to the vehicle key.  
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-  
imity to other electronic devices.  
83  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The options provided by the Remote Serv-  
ices of the BMW app include the ability to  
lock and unlock a vehicle.  
Warning  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
This requires an active BMW Connected-  
Drive contract and the BMW app must be  
installed on a smartphone.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via  
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.  
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is  
required.  
Key Card  
Warning  
Principle  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked  
and locked, as well as started.  
General information  
The availability of the Key Card depends on  
the equipment and the country.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
A digital key that has already been paired with  
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The  
digital key must be activated via iDrive.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key  
Card or take the Key Card with you because  
the active Key Card can be used to start the  
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to  
a service appointment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Safety information  
NOTICE  
Warning  
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the  
wireless charging tray at the same time, the  
Key Card could become damaged. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Do not place the  
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the  
same time as a mobile device.  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
84  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
5. Select Key Card.  
6. "Key Card active"  
Connection to the vehicle  
The communication between the vehicle and  
the Key Card uses near field communication,  
NFC.  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
Activating/deactivating Key Card in  
the vehicle  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
General information  
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the  
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the  
vehicle key.  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
Functional requirement  
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to  
activate and deactivate the Key Card.  
Hold the activated Key Card directly at the cen-  
ter of the driver's door handle.  
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change  
the position of the Key Card and repeat the  
procedure.  
Activating Key Card  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
NOTICE  
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the  
wireless charging tray at the same time, the  
Key Card could become damaged. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Do not place the  
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the  
same time as a mobile device.  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
2. Place Key Card in the center of the smart-  
phone tray.  
3. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play to activate the Key Card.  
Deactivating Key Card  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Digital Key"  
85  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Card with you. This ensures access to the ve-  
hicle, even in the event of a smartphone fail-  
ure. It is also helpful to have the vehicle key  
or Key Card with you if the vehicle needs to  
be handed over to another person. You can  
then hand over the vehicle key or the Key Card  
instead of your smartphone. Always take the  
vehicle key with you to a service appointment.  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
2. Place activated Key Card in the center of  
the smartphone tray.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en-  
gine.  
With wireless charging tray:After starting the  
engine, take the Key Card out of the tray to  
make tray available for charging compatible  
smartphones.  
Safety information  
Malfunction  
Warning  
The vehicle may not be able to detect the Key  
Card if there are objects between the smart-  
phone tray and the Key Card, e.g., a wallet or  
smartphone case.  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
BMW Digital Key  
Principle  
Warning  
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un-  
locked and locked, as well as started, with a  
compatible smartphone.  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
General information  
The availability of the BMW Digital Key de-  
pends on the equipment and national-market  
version.  
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-  
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile  
devices such as a Smartwatch.  
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible  
smartphone, this function must be offered by  
the smartphone manufacturer. The BMW app  
provides a check to determine if the smart-  
phone and the vehicle are compatible.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
A driver profile with individual settings can be  
assigned to a digital key.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Additional information:  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Driver profiles, refer to page 65.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
When using a smartphone as a digital key, al-  
ways carry a vehicle key or the activated Key  
86  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Follow the instructions in the Digital Key menu  
in the BMW app or on the control display.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Sharing digital keys  
General information  
Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys  
with other people. This option is available via  
the smartphone that is enabled as main digital  
key. This function must be supported by the  
smartphone.  
NOTICE  
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the  
wireless charging tray at the same time, the  
Key Card could become damaged. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Do not place the  
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the  
same time as a mobile device.  
Forwarding authorization  
To share the digital key, select the correspond-  
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in  
the Wallet app.  
As soon as a digital key is shared with another  
person, the person will receive an invitation.  
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key  
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.  
Connection to the vehicle  
The communication between the vehicle and  
the smartphone uses near field communica-  
tion, NFC.  
Limiting the range of functions  
Certain functions of the digital key can be lim-  
ited before handing it over. For instance, if the  
Digital Key is passed on to a novice driver, the  
switch-off for driving stability control systems  
can be disabled and the engine power can  
be reduced. For more information, refer to the  
ConnectedDrive portal and the BMW app.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with BMW  
Digital Key  
The vehicle is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account of the vehicle owner.  
The rechargeable battery of the smart-  
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-  
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable  
battery depends on the smartphone.  
Authentication  
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone  
model, an authentication may be required for  
security and safety reasons.  
Enabling the main digital key  
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a  
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle  
owner must prove his authorization for the ve-  
hicle for this purpose.  
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key  
or another method may be used for authenti-  
cation. Follow the corresponding instructions  
on the smartphone or the control display.  
The proof of authorization can be started via  
the BMW app or the activation code in the  
corresponding smartphone function, e.g., the  
Wallet app. Both vehicle keys must be located  
in the vehicle to be enabled.  
87  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The main digital key must be enabled again to  
be able to use BMW Digital Key again.  
Deleting a shared key  
General information  
1. "CAR"  
Shared keys can be deleted via the smart-  
phone with the main digital key, via the smart-  
phone with a shared key or via iDrive.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Digital Key"  
5. "Reset function"  
The deletion via the smartphone using the  
main digital key will not be performed until the  
vehicle is used with a key other than the key to  
be deleted.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
The deletion via the smartphone with a shared  
key or via iDrive is executed immediately.  
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the  
list of enabled digital keys.  
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.  
Deletion via iDrive  
To be able to delete a digital key via iDrive, an  
authorized vehicle key must be located in the  
vehicle or the main key must be located in the  
smartphone tray.  
Hold the smartphone NFC antenna directly at  
the center of the driver's door handle.  
The position of the near field communication  
antenna depends on the smartphone model.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,  
make sure that all doors including the trunk lid  
are closed.  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Digital Key"  
5. If necessary, select the digital key.  
6. "Delete key"  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
Resetting the function  
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-  
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-  
hicle.  
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,  
all digital keys including the main digital key  
will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key is  
retained and deactivated.  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be  
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.  
2. Place smartphone in the center of the  
smartphone tray.  
Ensure that the display is facing up.  
88  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.  
Integrated key  
4. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en-  
gine.  
General information  
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked  
without the vehicle key using the integrated  
key.  
Sale of the smartphone  
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior  
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that  
the smartphone can no longer be used for the  
vehicle.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
integrated key also fits in the glove compart-  
ment.  
Sale of the vehicle  
Safety information  
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital  
Key function or remove the vehicle from the  
ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle  
owner.  
Warning  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
When the vehicle is removed from the Con-  
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-  
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key  
is retained and deactivated.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
System limits  
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen-  
sor of the alarm system cannot be switched off  
with a digital key.  
Additional information:  
Alarm system, refer to page 98.  
NOTICE  
The door lock is permanently joined with the  
door. The door handle can be moved. When  
pulling the door handle with the integrated  
key inserted, paint or the integrated key can  
be damaged. There is a risk of damage to  
property. Remove the integrated key before  
pulling the external door handle.  
Malfunction  
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
▷
The smartphone is shielded from the sen-  
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover  
that is not suitable.  
▷
Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card  
are located between the smartphone and  
the smartphone cover.  
89  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. Remove the cover cap.  
Removing  
4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the  
integrated key.  
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the  
integrated key, arrow 2.  
The other doors must be unlocked or locked  
from the inside.  
Locking/unlocking via the door lock  
1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with  
one hand.  
Alarm system  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated  
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-  
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.  
If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key  
via the door lock, the alarm system will not be  
activated.  
Buttons for the central  
locking system  
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from  
the back under the cover cap and push the  
cover cap out.  
General information  
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle  
is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning  
system and interior lights come on.  
Use the thumb for counter support to pre-  
vent the cover cap from falling out of the  
door handle.  
90  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle  
key when it is in close proximity or in the inte-  
rior.  
Overview  
General information  
Comfort Access supports the following func-  
tions:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the  
door handle.  
Touchless unlocking and locking of the ve-  
hicle.  
Buttons for the central locking system.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the  
BMW Digital Key.  
Locking  
Unlocking the trunk lid.  
Press the button with the front doors  
closed.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be  
outside of the vehicle near the doors.  
Unlocking  
▷
The next unlocking and locking cycle is not  
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.  
Press the button.  
Unlocking  
Opening  
▷
General information  
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking  
via the Comfort Access depends on the follow-  
ing settings:  
Press the button to unlock all the  
doors.  
Pull the door opener above the armrest.  
▷
▷
Front doors: pull the door opener on the  
door to open the door. The other doors re-  
main locked.  
▷
If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
▷
If the welcome light is switched on when  
the vehicle is being unlocked.  
Back doors: pull twice on the door opener  
on the door to be opened; the first time  
unlocks the door, the second time opens it.  
The other doors remain locked.  
Comfort Access  
Principle  
The vehicle can be accessed without operating  
the vehicle key.  
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket, is sufficient.  
91  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Unlocking the vehicle  
Locking the vehicle  
Close the driver's door.  
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.  
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a  
closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.  
1 second without grasping the door handle.  
In addition, the following functions are exe-  
cuted:  
▷
If a driver profile was assigned to the vehi-  
cle key, this driver profile will be activated  
and the settings that are stored in it will be  
applied.  
The following functions are executed:  
▷
All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap  
are locked.  
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off.  
▷
With alarm system: The alarm system will  
be switched on.  
Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.  
Unlocking the trunk lid  
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the  
button in the interior, they will not be folded  
out when unlocking.  
General information  
▷
With alarm system: The alarm system will  
be switched off.  
If you open the trunk lid via Comfort Access,  
locked doors will not be unlocked.  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
Locking  
General information  
Safety information  
The behavior of the vehicle during locking via  
the Comfort Access depends on the following  
settings:  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is  
clear while opening and closing.  
▷
If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
▷
If the exterior mirrors are automatically  
folded in when the vehicle is locked. The  
exterior mirrors are not folded in when the  
hazard warning flashers are switched on.  
▷
If pathway lighting is activated during lock-  
ing.  
92  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking  
zone for an extended period of time without  
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-  
cally.  
Warning  
While opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-  
age to property. Make sure that the travel  
path of the trunk lid is clear while opening  
and closing.  
If a passenger is detected in the front pass-  
enger seat and the front passenger seat belt  
is engaged when the vehicle is locked, the fol-  
lowing restrictions apply:  
▷
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
Unlocking  
The behavior of the vehicle during touchless  
unlocking/locking depends on the following  
settings:  
▷
▷
▷
If the automatic unlocking is active.  
If the automatic locking is active.  
If only the driver's door and the fuel filler  
flap or all access to the vehicle will be un-  
locked.  
Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: the  
driver's door and fuel filler flap will only be  
unlocked when the driver approaches the  
vehicle on the driver's side.  
Press the button on the outer side of the trunk  
lid.  
All vehicle entry points: the vehicle will be  
unlocked regardless of the side on which  
the driver approaches the vehicle.  
Touchless unlocking and locking of  
the vehicle  
▷
If the unlocking and locking of the vehicle  
is confirmed with a light signal or a sound  
signal.  
Principle  
When the driver approaches the locked vehicle  
with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.  
▷
▷
▷
If the welcome light is switched on when  
the vehicle is being unlocked.  
When the driver walks away from the unlocked  
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be  
locked.  
If pathway lighting is activated during lock-  
ing.  
If the exterior mirrors are automatically  
folded out and in when the vehicle is un-  
locked and locked.  
General information  
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-  
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking  
zone.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The unlocking zone is located within a radius  
of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the door handles.  
The drive-ready state must be turned off.  
▷
Unlocking: when entering the unlocking  
zone, the doors and trunk lid must be  
closed.  
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key  
leaves the locking zone.  
The locking zone is located within a radius of  
approx. 9 ft/2 m around the door handles.  
▷
Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the  
doors and trunk lid must be closed.  
93  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
For contactless locking of the vehicle, no  
second vehicle key may be within a radius  
of 18 ft/6 m around the vehicle.  
the trunk lid can be unlocked with the vehicle  
key and how the vehicle doors will function.  
With automatic transmission: selector lever po-  
sition P must be engaged to open the trunk lid  
with the vehicle key.  
If the vehicle has been in the idle state for  
several days, contactless unlocking/locking  
will only be available after the vehicle has  
been driven.  
It may not be possible to open the trunk lid  
when the vehicle is in valet parking mode.  
Valet parking mode, refer to page 95.  
Malfunction  
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
Safety information  
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.  
For replacing the battery, refer to page 82.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is  
clear while opening and closing.  
▷
Fault of the radio link from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
▷
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal  
objects.  
Do not transport the vehicle key together  
with metal objects.  
Warning  
While opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-  
age to property. Make sure that the travel  
path of the trunk lid is clear while opening  
and closing.  
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones  
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-  
ity to the vehicle key.  
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-  
imity to other electronic devices.  
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-  
ing request detection on the door handles.  
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock  
the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key  
or use the integrated key.  
Additional information:  
Integrated key, refer to page 89.  
Trunk lid  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, it is possible to specify whether  
94  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening and Closing  
Trunk emergency unlocking  
Opening from the outside  
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.  
The trunk lid unlocks.  
▷
▷
Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-  
ton on the outer side of the trunk lid.  
With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key  
with you and press the button on the outer  
side of the trunk lid.  
Valet parking mode  
Principle  
▷
Press and hold the button on the  
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.  
In the valet parking mode, the control display is  
disabled. The operation via iDrive is no longer  
possible.  
When unlocking with the vehicle key, the  
doors may also be unlocked.  
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle  
is handed over for valet parking.  
Open from inside  
General information  
Press the button in the storage compart-  
ment of the driver's door.  
In the valet parking mode, it is not possible  
to change vehicle settings via iDrive. Personal  
profiles cannot be changed. Personal data  
cannot be displayed.  
Closing  
Additionally, the following actions are carried  
out:  
▷
▷
The volume of the audio system is limited.  
The integrated Universal Remote Control is  
deactivated.  
▷
▷
The Dynamic Stability Control cannot be  
turned off.  
Depending on the vehicle, the trunk lid can  
be locked and disconnected from the cen-  
tral locking system.  
Grasp the recessed grips and pull the trunk lid  
down.  
95  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The trunk lid will be locked and discon-  
nected from the central locking system.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
At least one driver profile has been created.  
2. "Activate now"  
A driver profile or the guest profile is active.  
At least one driver profile has an assigned  
ConnectedDrive account.  
Driver profile without PIN  
A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.  
Accessing the menu for the valet  
parking mode  
1. "PIN"  
2. Enter PIN.  
3. "Lock tailgate as well"  
Via the switch-off screen  
The trunk lid will be locked and discon-  
nected from the central locking system.  
After switching off drive-ready state the  
switch-off screen will be displayed. Select the  
entry for the valet parking mode on the switch-  
off screen.  
4. "Activate linkage"  
5. "Activate now"  
Guest profile  
The guest profile is the active driver profile.  
Via the display bar at the upper edge  
of the control display  
1. Tip the Controller up.  
A PIN must be entered.  
2. "Valet parking mode"  
1. "PIN"  
2. Enter PIN.  
Via the vehicle settings  
1. "CAR"  
3. "Lock tailgate as well"  
The trunk lid will be locked and discon-  
nected from the central locking system.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Valet parking mode"  
4. "Activate now"  
This PIN can be used once to deactivate  
the valet parking mode for the active guest  
profile.  
Activating the valet parking mode  
General information  
Before activating the valet parking mode, a  
PIN must be set up to be able to deactivate  
the valet parking mode at a future time.  
Deactivating valet parking mode  
General information  
The lock screen of the valet parking mode is  
displayed on the control display.  
The procedure for the PIN input varies de-  
pending on the active driver profile.  
The deactivation of the valet parking mode de-  
pends on which driver profile is selected on the  
lock screen.  
Driver profile with PIN  
A PIN has been stored for the active driver  
profile.  
It is not necessary to enter another PIN.  
1. "Lock tailgate as well"  
96  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Driver profile with PIN  
Unlocking and locking  
Regardless of which driver activated the valet  
parking mode, a driver can deactivate the valet  
parking mode by entering his/her PIN.  
Doors  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Key button settings"  
1. Select driver profile.  
2. Enter the assigned PIN for the driver profile.  
4.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
Select the icon.  
If you forgot the PIN, the valet parking mode  
must be deactivated by entering the assigned  
ConnectedDrive access data.  
▷
"Driver's door only"  
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler  
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un-  
locks the entire vehicle.  
Driver profile without PIN  
The valet parking mode was activated by an-  
other person. To deactivate the valet parking  
mode, a driver without a PIN has to enter the  
access data for his ConnectedDrive account.  
▷
"All doors"  
The entire vehicle is unlocked.  
1. Select driver profile.  
Confirmation signals from the vehicle  
1. "CAR"  
2. Enter the ConnectedDrive access data as-  
signed to the driver profile.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
Guest profile  
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma-  
tion signals:  
In the guest profile, the valet parking mode can  
only be deactivated if the valet parking mode  
was activated in the guest profile.  
▷
"Flash when locking/unlocking"  
Unlocking is signaled by flashing twice,  
locking by flashing once.  
1. Select guest profile.  
2. Enter the PIN that was specified during ac-  
tivation.  
▷
With alarm system:  
"Sound when locking/unlocking"  
If the PIN has been forgotten, the valet park-  
ing mode must be deactivated via a personal  
driver profile.  
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound  
signals, locking is confirmed with one  
sound signal.  
Settings  
Folding mirrors in automatically  
1. "CAR"  
General information  
2. "Settings"  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings for opening  
and closing are possible.  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"  
These settings are stored for the driver profile  
currently used.  
Automatic unlocking  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
97  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Unlock at end of trip"  
Depending on the equipment, the trunk  
lid will be unlocked or opened and the  
doors are unlocked.  
After drive-ready state is switched off by  
pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked  
vehicle is automatically unlocked.  
▷
▷
"Tailgate opens only when vehicle is  
unlocked."  
The vehicle must be unlocked before  
the trunk lid can be used with the vehicle  
key.  
Automatic locking  
1. "CAR"  
"Lock tailgate button"  
2. "Settings"  
The operation of the trunk lid via the  
vehicle key is disabled.  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Lock in a few minutes"  
Comfort Access  
The vehicle locks automatically after a  
short period of time if no door is opened  
after unlocking.  
Touchless locking and unlocking  
Contactless locking and unlocking can be  
switched on or off.  
▷
"Lock after starting to drive"  
The vehicle locks automatically after you  
drive off.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Comfort access"  
Trunk lid  
Trunk lid and doors  
You can set up if only the trunk lid will be  
unlocked or if the doors will also be unlocked  
when the trunk lid is unlocked  
Establishing idle state after opening  
the front doors  
1. "CAR"  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
country version, this setting may not be of-  
fered.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"  
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"  
Idle state, refer to page 38.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Key button settings"  
Alarm system  
4.  
Select the icon.  
The text next to the icon indicates the cur-  
rent setting.  
Principle  
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic  
signal when someone attempts to open the  
locked vehicle incorrectly.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Tailgate"  
Depending on the equipment, the trunk  
lid will be unlocked or opened.  
General information  
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm  
system reacts to the following changes:  
▷
"Tailgate and door(s)"  
98  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid.  
Movements in the interior.  
Panic mode  
You can trigger the alarm system if you find  
yourself in a dangerous situation.  
Changes in the vehicle inclination such as  
during attempts at stealing a wheel or  
when towing the vehicle.  
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key  
and hold for at least 3 seconds.  
▷
▷
Disconnected battery voltage.  
▷
Briefly press the button on the vehicle key  
three times in succession.  
Improper use of the socket for OBD on-  
board diagnostics.  
To switch off the alarm: press any button.  
▷
Locking the vehicle while a device is con-  
nected to the diagnostic socket.  
Indicator light on the interior mirror  
The alarm system signals these changes visu-  
ally and acoustically:  
▷
Acoustic alarm:  
Depending on local regulations, the acous-  
tic alarm may be suppressed.  
▷
Optical alarm:  
By flashing of the hazard warning system  
and headlights, where required.  
Do not modify the system to ensure function of  
the alarm system.  
▷
▷
The indicator light flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
Turning on/off  
The alarm system is turned on or off as soon  
as the vehicle is locked or unlocked with the  
vehicle key or via Comfort Access.  
The alarm system is switched on.  
Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec-  
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec-  
onds:  
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor  
are not active, as doors, hood, or trunk lid  
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed  
access points are secured.  
Opening the doors with the alarm  
system switched on  
The alarm system is triggered when a door  
is opened if the door was unlocked using the  
integrated key in the door lock.  
When the remaining open access points  
are closed, the interior motion sensor and  
tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.  
Opening the trunk lid with the alarm  
system switched on  
The trunk lid can be opened even when the  
alarm system is switched on.  
▷
▷
The indicator light goes out after unlocking:  
The vehicle has not been tampered with.  
The indicator light flashes after unlocking  
until drive-ready state is switched on, but  
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:  
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked  
and monitored again provided the doors are  
locked. The hazard warning system flashes  
once.  
An alarm has been deployed.  
99  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked  
again.  
Tilt alarm sensor  
The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.  
The alarm system responds in situations such  
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-  
cle is towed.  
Ending the alarm  
▷
Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.  
Interior motion sensor  
The vehicle interior is monitored.  
▷
Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key  
and activate the drive-ready state via emer-  
gency detection of the vehicle key.  
The alarm system responds when movement  
is detected in the vehicle interior.  
Malfunction, refer to page 83.  
The car's interior is monitored to the height  
of the seat surfaces. The alarm system is  
switched on together with the interior motion  
sensor even when the convertible top is open.  
Falling objects such as leaves can trigger the  
alarm unintentionally.  
▷
With Comfort Access: when carrying the ve-  
hicle key, grasp the driver's door or front  
passenger door handle completely.  
Power windows  
Avoiding unintentional alarms  
General information  
The windows can be opened with the vehicle  
key from the outside as well as closed with  
Comfort Access.  
General information  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-  
thorized action occurred.  
When a window is frequently opened to the  
same position, this task can be performed by  
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. For in-  
stance when the same parking garage is fre-  
quently used.  
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:  
▷
▷
▷
In car washes.  
In duplex garages.  
Additional information:  
During transport on trains carrying vehicles,  
at sea or on a trailer.  
▷
▷
Vehicle key, refer to page 79.  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 50.  
▷
▷
With animals in the vehicle.  
When the vehicle is locked after start of re-  
fueling.  
Safety information  
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion  
sensor can be switched off in such situations.  
Warning  
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and  
interior motion sensor  
When operating the windows, body parts and  
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-  
jury or risk of damage to property. Make sure  
that the travel path of the windows is clear  
while opening and closing.  
Press the button on the vehicle key  
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle  
is locked.  
The indicator light illuminates for approx.  
2 seconds and then continues to flash.  
100  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Anti-trap mechanism  
Principle  
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or  
body parts becoming jammed between the  
door frame and window while a window is be-  
ing closed.  
General information  
If resistance or blockage is detected while a  
window is being closed, the closing will be in-  
terrupted.  
Power windows  
Safety information  
Functional requirements  
The windows can be operated under the fol-  
lowing conditions.  
Warning  
Accessories on the windows such as anten-  
nas can impact anti-trap mechanism. There  
is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in  
the area of movement of the windows.  
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.  
Opening  
▷
Closing without the anti-trap  
mechanism  
Press the switch to the resistance  
point.  
In case of danger from the outside or if icing  
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
The window opens while the switch is be-  
ing held.  
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
1.  
Pull the switch past the resistance  
point and hold it there.  
The window opens automatically. Pressing  
the switch again stops the motion.  
The window closes with limited anti-trap  
mechanism. If the closing force exceeds a  
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.  
Closing  
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance  
point.  
2.  
Pull the switch past the resistance  
point again within approx. 4 seconds and  
hold it there.  
The window closes while the switch is be-  
ing held.  
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
The window closes without the anti-trap  
mechanism.  
The window closes automatically if the  
door is closed. Pulling again stops the mo-  
tion.  
101  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Convertible top  
Warning  
General information  
Body parts can be jammed when opening  
and closing the convertible top. There is a  
risk of injury. When opening and closing the  
convertible top, observe the movement and  
keep the travel path clear.  
Follow the following information:  
▷
Close the convertible top when the vehi-  
cle is parked. A closed convertible top pro-  
tects it from weather-related damage and  
to some extent from theft.  
▷
▷
Even when the convertible top is closed,  
only store valuables in the locked cargo  
area.  
Warning  
When operating the convertible top while  
driving, the view to the rear may be lim-  
ited. At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h the  
convertible top stops in its current position.  
There may be a risk of accidents and risk  
of damage to property. When operating the  
convertible top while driving, observe traffic  
attentively and, if necessary, reduce speed.  
Do not operate while reversing or in windy  
weather.  
At higher speeds, a vacuum produced in  
the vehicle interior causes the convertible  
top to begin to flutter. Increase the air flow  
via the ventilation to prevent a vacuum in  
the vehicle.  
▷
It is not possible to start the engine and  
operate the convertible top simultaneously.  
When the engine is started using the Start/  
Stop button or using the Auto Start/Stop  
function, the convertible top movement is  
briefly interrupted.  
▷
▷
Opening a door interrupts closure of the  
convertible top.  
Warning  
The convertible top is not suitable for the  
installation of roof carrier systems. The roof  
carrier could come loose. There is a risk of  
accident. Do not mount any roof carrier sys-  
tems to the convertible top.  
In order to protect the battery, move the  
convertible top only when the engine is run-  
ning.  
▷
▷
Remove objects stowed in the convertible  
top compartment before opening the  
convertible top.  
Before closing the convertible top, remove  
any foreign objects from the windshield  
frame; otherwise, closing may be pre-  
vented.  
Warning  
A convertible top that is not completely open  
or closed is not locked and can open by itself  
while driving due to the air stream. There is  
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that the convertible top is always  
completely open or closed.  
NOTICE  
Incorrect operation can damage the  
convertible top and other parts of the vehicle.  
102  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
There is a risk of damage to property. During  
operation, heed the following points:  
With Steptronic transmission  
▷
Keep the area of movement of the  
convertible top clear because the  
convertible top swivels out and upward.  
Maximum area of movement: 98.5 in-  
ches/2.5 meters.  
▷
▷
Fully close the trunk lid.  
Do not leave the convertible top open for  
more than a day while it is wet.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Do not open the convertible top, if it is  
wet, covered in snow, iced up, or dirty.  
Convertible top switch  
Do not place objects on the convertible  
top.  
Functional requirements  
The following prerequisites must be met in or-  
der to be able to move the convertible top.  
The rollover protection system may not  
be triggered.  
Do not operate the convertible top on  
uneven sections of road.  
▷
▷
The maximum speed is 30 mph/50 km/h.  
The standby state is switched on and the  
brake pedal is depressed or the drive-ready  
state is switched on.  
Always open or close the convertible top  
completely. The convertible top is only  
locked in its end positions.  
▷
▷
The outside temperature is above  
14 ℉/-10 ℃.  
The voltage of the vehicle electrical system  
is sufficient.  
Overview  
With manual transmission  
▷
▷
The convertible top drive is not overheating.  
The windows can be opened and closed  
automatically.  
If one of these prerequisites is not met, a check  
control message is displayed.  
Operating from the inside  
Opening  
Push the switch and hold it.  
Convertible top switch  
The windows roll down and the convertible top  
opens while the switch is being pushed.  
Closing  
Pull the switch and hold it.  
103  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The windows are lowered, the convertible top  
is closed, and the windows are raised again  
while the switch is being pulled.  
Safety information  
Warning  
In case of an electrical malfunction, the  
convertible top cannot be locked in the fully  
open position. The convertible top will rise up  
while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk of  
accident. Do not open the closed convertible  
top manually.  
Preventing an interruption  
Push or pull the switch until the convertible  
top is completely open or closed and the  
end of the procedure is indicated by a Check  
Control message. Always make sure that the  
side cover flaps are completely closed. The  
convertible top can only be locked if the  
convertible top is completely open or closed.  
Warning  
The convertible top movement is interrupted  
if the switch is released. The sequence can  
be continued in the desired direction using the  
switch.  
While manually lowering the convertible top,  
body parts can be jammed. With one-sided  
operation, the convertible top can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the convertible top and the  
convertible top well storage cover is free.  
Only close the convertible top manually with  
two people.  
The convertible is not locked in this case. Op-  
erate switch again until the convertible opera-  
tion is terminated.  
Operation from the outside  
When equipped with Comfort Access the  
convertible top can also be operated from out-  
side.  
Before closing  
Convenient opening and convenient closing via  
the vehicle key.  
1. Lower the side windows completely.  
2. Switching off, standby state.  
Start/Stop button, refer to page 122.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle key, refer to page 79.  
3. Take the hexagon wrench out of the on-  
board vehicle tool kit.  
Manually closing the convertible top  
General information  
If there is a fault, the convertible top can be  
manually closed. Two persons are necessary  
to do this.  
If possible, have the convertible top closed  
manually by an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or repair shop.  
104  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
screw on the right side of the vehicle clock-  
wise to the stop.  
Lifting out convertible top  
1. Carefully swivel the covers up on both sides  
until they are open.  
4. Lift the convertible top out on the front on  
both sides, and swing it forward.  
2. Position the hexagon wrench in the screw.  
3. Turn the screw on the left side of the vehi-  
cle counterclockwise to the stop. Turn the  
105  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Turn the hexagon wrench clockwise to the  
stop to open the locking hooks.  
Convertible top locking  
1. Carefully remove the cover in the center of  
the front convertible top frame.  
5. While one person presses the center of the  
front convertible top frame from the out-  
side onto the windshield frame: turn the  
hexagon wrench counterclockwise to the  
stop to close the locking hooks. The front  
convertible top frame must be locked in the  
windshield frame.  
2. Take the square socket adapter out of the  
cover.  
6. Have the convertible top checked by an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
NOTICE  
When driving in the rain or on a wet road  
surface with the convertible top locked only  
in the front, water will penetrate the car's in-  
terior. There is a risk of damage to property.  
Do not drive in the rain or on a wet road  
surface with the convertible top locked only in  
the front.  
3. Insert the square socket adapter in the hex-  
agon wrench.  
NOTICE  
Driving faster than 50 mph/80 km/h with the  
convertible locked only in the front may dam-  
age the convertible top. There is a risk of  
damage to property. When driving with the  
convertible top locked only in the front, do not  
exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.  
4. Position the hexagon wrench with inserted  
adapter on the convertible top locking (ar-  
row).  
106  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Installing  
Wind deflector  
Principle  
The wind deflector reduces the air movement  
in the vehicle interior when driving with the  
convertible top down.  
The wind deflector is most effective when the  
side windows are closed.  
General information  
The integrated wind deflector is held in posi-  
tion by magnetic force.  
Press the wind deflector down evenly to the  
stop.  
The magnetic retaining force must be noticea-  
ble.  
The magnets are located on the lower end of  
the wind deflector fitting.  
Do not store any electronic storage media,  
cards with magnetic strips or chip cards in the  
immediate vicinity of the magnets.  
Removing  
Safety information  
Warning  
A wind deflector that has not been mounted  
correctly may fly off and be thrown into the  
vehicle or endanger other road users. There  
is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-  
erty.  
Pull the wind deflector up evenly.  
The magnetic retaining force must be over-  
come when pulling the wind deflector out of  
the guides.  
Before drive-off, make sure that the wind de-  
flector is completely pushed down to the stop  
and mounted.  
107  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
the protective effect of the seat belt can no  
longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding  
under the seat belt in an accident. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat  
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest  
so that it is in the most upright position as  
possible and do not adjust again while driv-  
ing.  
Sitting safely  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of  
the occupants can make a vital contribution to  
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.  
In the event of an accident, the correct seat  
position plays an important role. Follow the in-  
formation in the following chapters.  
Additional information:  
Electrically adjustable seats  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seats, refer to page 108.  
General information  
The current seat position can be stored using  
the memory function.  
Seat belts, refer to page 110.  
Head restraints, refer to page 112.  
Airbags, refer to page 169.  
Overview  
Seats  
Safety information  
Warning  
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-  
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-  
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Only adjust the  
seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is  
stationary.  
1
Forward/backward, height, seat tilt  
Backrest tilt  
2
108  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Backrest tilt  
3
4
Backrest width  
Lumbar support  
Longitudinal direction  
Tilt switch forward or backward.  
Calibrating the front seats  
Press switch forward or backward.  
General information  
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer  
functions precisely, a Check Control message  
is displayed on the control display.  
Height  
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-  
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.  
Safety information  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
Press switch up or down.  
Seat tilt  
Calibrating the front seat  
1. Press the longitudinal direction switch for-  
ward until the seat stops.  
2. Press the switch forward again until the  
seat stops.  
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.  
As soon as the message on the control dis-  
play disappears, the calibration is complete.  
If the message remains active, repeat the cali-  
bration.  
Tilt switch up or down.  
109  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
If this message is still shown after repeated  
calibration, have the vehicle checked by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Backrest width  
Principle  
Adjusting the backrest width may improve side  
support when cornering.  
Thigh support  
General information  
The backrest width is changed by adjusting  
the side sections of the backrest.  
Sport seat  
Adjusting  
▷
▷
Press the front section of the  
button:  
The backrest width de-  
creases.  
Press the rear section of the  
button:  
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push  
the thigh support forward or back.  
The backrest width in-  
creases.  
Lumbar support  
Seat belts  
Principle  
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-  
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar  
region of the spine. The lower back and the  
spine are supported for upright sitting position.  
General information  
The vehicle is fitted with two seat belts to en-  
sure occupant safety. However, the seat belts  
can only offer protection when adjusted cor-  
rectly.  
Adjusting  
▷
▷
Press the front/rear section  
of the button:  
Always make sure that seat belts are being  
worn by the occupants before driving off. The  
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-  
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-  
place seat belts.  
The curvature is in-  
creased/decreased.  
Press the upper/lower sec-  
tion of the button:  
All belt fastening points are designed to ach-  
ieve the best possible protective effect of the  
seat belts with proper use of the seat belts and  
correct seat setting. Notes on sitting safely, re-  
fer to page 108.  
The curvature is shifted up/  
down.  
110  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Correct use of seat belts  
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one  
person will potentially defeat the ability of  
the seat belt to serve its protective function.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Do not strap in more than one person per  
single seat belt. Infants and children are not  
allowed on an occupant's lap, and must be  
transported and secured in designated child  
restraint systems.  
▷
Insert the seat belt into the seat belt guide.  
▷
Wear the seat belt tight to your body over  
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.  
▷
▷
Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over  
your lap. The seat belt must not press on  
your stomach.  
Do not rub the seat belt against sharp  
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard  
or fragile objects.  
▷
▷
Avoid thick clothing.  
Warning  
Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward  
around your upper body area.  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all  
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.  
Buckling the seat belt  
1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder  
and hip to put it on.  
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt  
buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage  
audibly.  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, may not be fully operational or fail  
in the following situations:  
▷
The seat belts or seat belt buckles are  
damaged, soiled, or changed in any  
other way.  
▷
Seat belt tensioners or seat belt winders  
were modified.  
Unbuckling the seat belt  
1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.  
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in  
the event of an accident. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep clean and do  
not modify: seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat  
belt tensioners, seat belt winders, and seat  
belt anchors. After an accident, have the seat  
belts checked by an authorized service center  
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.  
3. Guide the seat belt back into the seat belt  
winder.  
111  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
The seat belt reminder is also activated when  
a passenger unbuckles a rear seat belt during  
the trip.  
Seat belt guide  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-  
minates after the engine is started.  
The displays may vary depending on the  
equipment version and country variant.  
Icon  
Description  
When buckling seat belts, make sure the seat  
belt guide is closed.  
Green: the seat belt is buckled  
on the corresponding rear seat.  
The magnet may open if the seat position has  
been changed.  
Seat belt reminder for driver’s seat  
and passenger’s seat  
Red: the seat belt is not buck-  
led on the corresponding rear  
seat.  
General information  
The seat belt reminder is issued when the driv-  
er's side seat belt is not buckled.  
The seat belt reminder is also active when the  
front passenger seat belt is not buckled or ob-  
jects are on the front passenger seat.  
Front head restraints  
Safety information  
Warning  
The seat belt reminder is also activated when  
a passenger unbuckles a seat belt during the  
trip.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-  
straints can cause injuries in the head and  
neck area. There is a risk of injury.  
The indicator light illuminates and a  
signal sounds. Make sure that the seat  
belts are positioned correctly. The seat  
belt reminder can also be activated if objects  
are placed on the front passenger seat.  
▷
Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center  
supports the back of the head at as  
close to eye level as possible.  
Seat belt reminder for rear seats  
General information  
The seat belt reminder is automatically acti-  
vated each time the engine starts.  
112  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-  
Exterior mirrors  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
General information  
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is  
more curved than the driver's side mirror.  
For manually adjustable head restraints:  
After adjusting, make sure that the head  
restraint is correctly engaged.  
The mirror setting is stored for the driver pro-  
file currently in use. When a driver profile is  
selected, the saved position is called up auto-  
matically.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when moving the  
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the head restraint.  
The current exterior mirror position can be  
stored using the memory function.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
Objects in the mirror are closer than they ap-  
pear. The distance to the road users behind  
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance  
while changing lanes. There is a risk of ac-  
cident, injury, or property damage. Estimate  
the distance to the traffic behind by looking  
over your shoulder.  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-  
tective effect in the head and neck area.  
There is a risk of injury.  
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
Overview  
Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
Adjusting the height  
The height of the head restraints cannot be  
set.  
Adjusting the distance  
The distance to the back of the head is ad-  
justed via the backrest inclination.  
1
Adjusting  
2
3
Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor  
Folding in and out  
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint  
is as close as possible to the back of the head.  
Adjusting the exterior mirrors  
Removing  
The head restraints cannot be removed.  
Press the button.  
113  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
The selected mirror moves along with the but-  
ton movement.  
Automatic Curb Monitor  
Principle  
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on  
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This  
improves your view of the curb and other low-  
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.  
Selecting a mirror  
To change over to the other mirror:  
Slide the switch.  
Activating  
Malfunction  
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the  
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror  
glass.  
1.  
Slide the switch to the driver's side  
mirror position.  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
Folding in and out  
Deactivating  
Slide the switch to the front passenger's side  
exterior mirror position.  
NOTICE  
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle  
can be damaged in car washes. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Before washing,  
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.  
Interior mirror, manually  
dimmable  
Press the button.  
Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap-  
prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.  
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the  
following situations:  
▷
▷
In car washes.  
On narrow roads.  
Mirrors that were folded in are folded  
out automatically at a speed of approx.  
25 mph/40 km/h.  
To reduce the blinding glare of the interior mir-  
ror, flip the lever forward.  
Automatic heating  
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated  
as needed and when the drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
Interior mirror, automatic  
dimming feature  
General information  
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.  
Automatic dimming feature  
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-  
tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior  
mirror are used to control this.  
Photocells are used for control:  
114  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In the mirror glass.  
1. Fold the lever down completely.  
On the rear of the mirror.  
2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands  
and move the steering wheel to the prefer-  
red height and angle to suit your seat posi-  
tion.  
Overview  
3. Fold the lever back up.  
Steering wheel heating  
Overview  
Functional requirements  
▷
Keep the photocells clean.  
▷
Do not cover the area between the interior  
mirror and the windshield.  
Button for steering wheel heating  
Steering wheel  
Safety information  
Warning  
Turning on/off  
Press the button.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes  
after an intermediate stop, the steering wheel  
heating turns on automatically if the function  
was turned on at the completion of the last trip.  
Steering wheel adjustments while driving  
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-  
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is  
a risk of accident, injury, or property damage.  
Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is  
stationary only.  
Memory function  
Manual steering wheel adjustment  
Principle  
The following settings can be stored and, if  
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-  
tion:  
▷
▷
▷
Seat position.  
Exterior mirror position.  
Height of the Head-up display.  
115  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Two memory locations with different settings  
can be set for each driver profile.  
Storing  
1. Set the desired position.  
2.  
Press the button. The LED in the  
button illuminates.  
The following settings are not stored:  
▷
▷
Backrest width.  
Lumbar support.  
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the  
LED is illuminated. A signal sounds.  
Safety information  
Calling up settings  
Press the desired button 1 or 2.  
Warning  
The stored position is called up.  
Using the memory function while driving can  
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel  
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Only retrieve the memory function  
when the vehicle is stationary.  
The procedure stops when a switch for setting  
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but-  
tons is pressed again.  
The adjustment of the seat position on the  
driver's side is interrupted after a short time  
while driving.  
Warning  
Seat heating  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
Overview  
Overview  
Seat heating  
Turning on  
Press the button once for each tem-  
perature level.  
The memory buttons are located on the front  
door.  
The maximum temperature is reached when  
three LEDs are illuminated.  
When ECO PRO is activated, the heater output  
is reduced.  
116  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "CAR"  
ECO PRO, refer to page 261.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
Turning off  
Press and hold the button until the  
LEDs turn off.  
4. If necessary, "Automate habits"  
5. Select the desired function.  
6. Activate the desired rule.  
7. Set the level.  
Climate control rules  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment, some heating  
and air conditioning functions can be automat-  
ically activated depending on the outside tem-  
perature.  
General information  
The outside temperature at which the func-  
tions are to be automatically activated can be  
set via iDrive.  
Activation is performed if the outside temper-  
ature exceeds or falls below the set tempera-  
ture in the first few minutes after drive-ready  
state has been switched on. A new adjustment  
is carried out after the settings have been  
changed.  
Depending on the equipment package, the  
following functions can be automatically acti-  
vated:  
▷
▷
Seat heating.  
Steering wheel heating.  
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-  
nutes after a stop, the functions are activated  
automatically with the levels that were last se-  
lected.  
Functional requirement  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
117  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Transporting children safely  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons,  
especially children, or animals. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave  
people, especially children, or animals unat-  
tended in the vehicle.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Warning  
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child  
restraint systems and their components to  
become very hot. Persons may sustain burn  
injuries when touching the hot components.  
There is a risk of injury. Do not expose  
the child restraint system to direct sunlight  
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let  
the child restraint system cool down before  
transporting a child. Do not leave children un-  
attended in the vehicle.  
The right place for children  
Safety information  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Children on the front passenger  
seat  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
General information  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
Before using a child restraint system on the  
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,  
knee, and side airbags on the passenger's side  
are deactivated.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
For automatic deactivation of front passenger  
airbags, refer to page 171.  
118  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
erly restrained in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Do not use child restraint systems which  
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-  
dent.  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
If attachment systems have been damaged  
or strained by an accident, have them  
checked and replaced by an authorized serv-  
ice center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop.  
Warning  
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly  
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without  
suitable additional child restraint systems.  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Secure children  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child  
restraint systems.  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system is  
limited or compromised with incorrect seat  
setting or improper installation of the child  
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Make sure that the child restraint system fits  
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-  
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests  
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that  
seats and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the  
height of the head restraints or remove them.  
On the front passenger seat  
Installing child restraint  
systems  
Deactivating the airbags  
General information  
Warning  
Pay attention to the specifications and the op-  
erating and safety information of the child re-  
straint system manufacturer when selecting,  
installing, and using child restraint systems.  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
Safety information  
Before installing a child restraint system in the  
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,  
knee and side airbags on the passenger's side  
are deactivated.  
Warning  
The protective effect of child restraint sys-  
tems and their fastening systems which have  
been damaged or exposed to an accident  
can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-  
Additional information:  
119  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
For automatic deactivation of front passenger  
airbags, refer to page 171.  
Locking the seat belt  
1. Pull out the seat belt strap completely.  
2. Secure the child restraint system with the  
seat belt.  
Seat position and height  
After installing a child restraint system, move  
the front passenger seat as far back as it will  
go and, if possible, bring it up to the highest  
position. This seat position and height ensure  
the best possible position for the belt and of-  
fers optimal protection in the event of an acci-  
dent.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
and pull it tight against the child restraint  
system. The seat belt is disabled.  
Unlocking the seat belt  
1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.  
2. Remove the child restraint system.  
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt  
is located in front of the seat belt guide of the  
child seat, move the front passenger seat care-  
fully forward until the best possible seat belt  
guide position is reached.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
completely.  
Child restraint systems with  
tether strap  
Backrest width  
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a  
child restraint system in the front passenger  
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do  
not change the backrest width again and do  
not call up a memory position.  
General information  
When attaching child restraint systems to the  
upper attachment points, observe the specifi-  
cations and the operating and safety informa-  
tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.  
Child seat security  
Safety information  
Warning  
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used  
for the child restraint system, the protective  
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En-  
sure that the upper retaining strap is guided  
to the upper attachment point without twist-  
ing and not over sharp edges.  
The seat belt on the passenger's side can be  
locked to fasten child restraint systems.  
Warning  
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-  
tachment points of the child restraint system  
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-  
tems only. If other objects are attached, the  
mounts or attachment points can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-  
120  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
age to property. Only attach child restraint  
systems at the corresponding mounts for the  
lower anchors or attachment points.  
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the  
attachment point.  
4. Tighten the retaining strap.  
Attachment points  
Icon  
Meaning  
The respective icon shows the  
attachment point for the upper  
retaining strap. Seats with an  
upper top tether are marked  
with this icon. It is located on  
the rear seat backrest, the rear  
shelf or the rear seat.  
Routing the retaining strap  
1
Driving direction  
Head restraint  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Hook for upper retaining strap  
Attachment point/eye  
Vehicle floor  
Fit  
Upper retaining strap  
Attaching the upper retaining strap  
to the attachment point  
1. Open the attachment point cover.  
2. Guide the upper retaining strap over the  
head restraint to the anchor.  
121  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
Vehicle features and options Auto Start/Stop function  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
Principle  
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
The system switches off the engine during a  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
The engine starts automatically for driving off.  
functions and systems. When using these  
Additional information:  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Coasting, refer to page 263.  
General information  
Start/Stop button  
After each engine start using the Start/Stop  
button, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready.  
The function is activated from speeds of ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Principle  
Pressing the Start/Stop button  
switches drive-ready state on or  
off.  
Depending on the selected driving mode, the  
system is automatically activated or deacti-  
vated.  
Manual transmission: the drive-  
ready state is switched on when  
you depress the clutch pedal while pressing  
the Start/Stop button.  
Engine stop  
Functional requirements  
Steptronic transmission: the drive-ready state  
is switched on when you depress the brake  
pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button.  
Manual transmission  
The engine is switched off automatically during  
a stop under the following conditions:  
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches  
the drive-ready state back off and standby  
state is switched back on.  
▷
Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is  
not pressed.  
Additional information:  
▷
The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv-  
er's door is closed.  
▷
▷
Drive-ready state, refer to page 40.  
Standby state, refer to page 39.  
Steptronic transmission  
Driving off  
The engine is switched off automatically during  
a stop under the following conditions:  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
2. Apply gear position.  
3. Release the parking brake.  
4. Driving off.  
122  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The selector lever is in selector lever posi-  
tion D.  
The display indicates that the  
conditions for an automatic en-  
gine stop have not been met.  
The brake pedal remains depressed while  
the vehicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is  
held by Automatic Hold.  
▷
The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv-  
er's door is closed.  
Total time with switched-off engine  
ECO PRO driving mode: de-  
pending on the vehicle equip-  
ment, the total time that the  
engine has been switched off  
using the Auto Start/Stop func-  
tion is displayed on an auto-  
matic engine stop.  
Steptronic transmission: manual  
engine stop  
If the engine was not switched off automati-  
cally when the vehicle stopped, the engine can  
be switched off manually:  
▷
Depress the brake pedal forcefully again  
from the current pedal position.  
The total time can be reset via the trip data.  
Additional information:  
▷
Engage selector lever position P.  
ECO PRO, refer to page 261.  
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled,  
the engine switches off.  
Functional limitations  
The engine is not switched off automatically in  
the following situations:  
Air conditioning system when the  
engine is switched off  
The air flow from the air conditioning system is  
reduced when the engine is switched off.  
▷
▷
▷
In case of a steep downhill grade.  
Brake not engaged strongly enough.  
The outside temperature is high and auto-  
matic climate control is running.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
▷
▷
The car's interior has not yet been heated  
or cooled to the required level.  
General information  
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:  
Where there is a risk of window condensa-  
tion when the automatic climate control is  
switched on.  
The display in the instrument  
cluster indicates that the Auto  
Start/Stop function is ready for  
an automatic engine start.  
▷
Engine or other parts not at operating tem-  
perature.  
▷
▷
Engine cooling is required.  
Instrument cluster without enhanced features:  
The wheels are at a sharp angle or the  
steering wheel is being turned.  
The display in the instrument  
cluster indicates that the Auto  
Start/Stop function is ready for  
an automatic engine start.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.  
At higher elevations.  
Hood is unlocked.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is acti-  
vated.  
123  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Stop-and-go traffic.  
▷
▷
▷
In case of excessive warming of the interior  
when air conditioning is turned on.  
Steptronic transmission: selector lever posi-  
tion in N or R.  
In case of excessive cooling of the interior  
when the heating is turned on.  
▷
▷
After driving in reverse.  
In case of a risk of window condensa-  
tion when the automatic climate control is  
turned on.  
Use of fuel with high ethanol content.  
Starting the engine  
Functional requirements  
Manual transmission  
▷
▷
Without mild hybrid technology: in case of a  
steering operation.  
Steptronic transmission:  
When changing from selector lever position  
D to N or R.  
The engine starts automatically under the fol-  
lowing preconditions:  
▷
Steptronic transmission:  
▷
By pressing the clutch pedal.  
When changing from selector lever position  
P to N, D, or R.  
Steptronic transmission  
▷
▷
In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat-  
tery.  
The engine starts automatically under the fol-  
lowing preconditions:  
When starting an oil level measurement.  
▷
▷
By releasing the brake pedal.  
When Automatic Hold is activated: step on  
the accelerator pedal.  
Additional functions Auto Start/Stop  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the vehicle features a variety of  
sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The  
Auto Start/Stop function uses this information  
to adapt to various traffic situations in an antic-  
ipatory manner.  
Driving off  
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.  
Safety mode  
After the engine switches off automatically, it  
will not start again automatically if any one of  
the following conditions are met:  
For instance, this applies to the following sit-  
uations:  
▷
A situation is detected in which the stop-  
ping time is expected to be very short. The  
engine is not automatically switched off. A  
message appears on the control display,  
depending on the situation.  
▷
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the  
driver's door is open.  
▷
Hood was unlocked.  
Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied  
length of time.  
▷
A situation is detected in which the vehi-  
cle should be started up immediately. The  
switched-off engine starts automatically.  
The engine can only be started via the Start/  
Stop button.  
The function may be restricted if the naviga-  
tion data is invalid, outdated or not available,  
for example.  
System limits  
Even if driving off was not intended, the deac-  
tivated engine starts up automatically in the  
following situations:  
124  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Activating/deactivating the system  
manually  
Switching off the vehicle during an  
automatic engine stop  
Principle  
General information  
The engine is not automatically switched off.  
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle  
can be switched off permanently, for instance  
when leaving it.  
The engine is started during an automatic en-  
gine stop.  
Manual transmission  
1. Press the Start/Stop button.  
Via button  
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.  
Standby state is switched on.  
2. Shift into first gear or reverse gear.  
3. Set the parking brake.  
Steptronic transmission  
1. Press the Start/Stop button.  
▷
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.  
Standby state is switched on.  
Press the button.  
Selector lever position P is engaged au-  
tomatically.  
Steptronic transmission: via selector  
lever position  
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deacti-  
vated in selector lever position M/S.  
2. Set the parking brake.  
Automatic deactivation  
General information  
Via the Driving Experience Control  
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deacti-  
vated in SPORT driving mode of the Driving  
Experience Control.  
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func-  
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea-  
sons, for instance if no driver is detected.  
Display  
Malfunction  
▷
LED is illuminated: Auto Start/Stop function  
is deactivated.  
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer  
switches off the engine automatically. A Check  
Control message is displayed. It is possible to  
continue driving. Have the vehicle checked by  
an authorized service center or another quali-  
fied service center or repair shop.  
▷
LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is  
activated.  
125  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Parking brake  
Principle  
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-  
cle from rolling away when it is parked.  
Safety information  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
Parking brake  
Setting the parking brake  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
With a stationary vehicle  
Pull the switch.  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
The LED illuminates.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates red. The parking  
brake is set.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
While driving  
General information  
Warning  
Use while driving serves as an emergency  
braking function.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle  
brakes hard while the switch is being  
pulled.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,  
and the brake lights illuminate.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
The parking brake is engaged when the vehi-  
cle is stationary.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
126  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Releasing the parking brake  
Releasing the parking brake manually  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
2.  
Manual transmission: press the  
switch while the brake pedal is depressed.  
Steptronic transmission: press the  
switch while the brake is depressed or se-  
lector lever position P is set.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
The parking brake is released.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Releasing the parking brake  
automatically  
The parking brake is released automatically  
when you drive off.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
Warning  
Steptronic transmission: Automatic  
Hold  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Principle  
Automatic Hold assists the driver by automati-  
cally setting and releasing the brake such as  
when moving in stop-and-go traffic.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
The vehicle is automatically held in place when  
it is stationary.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehi-  
cle from rolling back when driving off.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
General information  
Under the following conditions, the parking  
brake is automatically engaged:  
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.  
The driver's door is opened while the vehi-  
cle is stationary.  
▷
The moving vehicle is brought to a stand-  
still using the parking brake.  
127  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
NOTICE  
Driving off  
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.  
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold  
engages the parking brake and prevents the  
vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Deactivate Auto-  
matic Hold prior to entering the car wash.  
The brake is released automatically and the  
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer  
illuminated.  
Activating the parking brake  
automatically  
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-  
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is  
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle  
is exited.  
Overview  
The indicator light changes from green  
to red.  
The parking brake is not set automatically if  
the drive-ready state was switched off while  
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is  
deactivated.  
Automatic Hold  
Switching operational readiness off  
Press the button.  
The LED goes out.  
Establishing operational readiness of  
Automatic Hold  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
The indicator light goes out.  
2.  
Press the button.  
The LED illuminates.  
Automatic Hold is switched off.  
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,  
also press on the brake pedal when switching  
off.  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
Automatic Hold is ready to use.  
After every vehicle restart, the last se-  
lected setting is active.  
Malfunction  
If the parking brake fails or in case of a fault,  
secure the vehicle against rolling away before  
exiting.  
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle  
Operational readiness is established and the  
driver's door is closed.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-  
stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of  
the vehicle.  
After the brake is applied, the vehicle is  
kept from rolling away as soon as the  
indicator light illuminates green.  
128  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
The one-touch signaling duration can be ad-  
justed.  
After a power interruption  
To reestablish parking brake functionality after  
a power interruption:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
1. Turn on standby state.  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. "One-touch turn signal"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
2.  
Pull the switch while stepping on  
the brake pedal or while selector lever po-  
sition P is set and then push.  
This process may take a few seconds. Some  
mechanical sounds associated with this proc-  
ess are normal.  
Brief flashing  
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold  
it there for as long as you want the turn signal  
to flash.  
The indicator light is no longer illumi-  
nated as soon as the parking brake is  
ready for operation again.  
High-beam headlights,  
headlight flasher  
Turn signal  
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.  
Turn signal in exterior mirror  
When driving and during operation of the turn  
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold  
in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal  
lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.  
Flashing  
▷
▷
High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.  
The high-beam headlights illuminate when  
the low-beam headlights are switched on.  
High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher,  
arrow 2.  
Press the lever past the resistance point.  
One-touch signaling  
Lightly tap the lever up or down.  
129  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Press the lever up until the desired position is  
reached.  
Window wiper system  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Resting position of the wipers, position 0.  
Rain sensor, position 1.  
Normal wiper speed, position 2.  
Fast wiper speed, position 3.  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
When the journey is interrupted with the win-  
dow wiper system turned on: when the journey  
continues, the wipers resume at their previous  
speed.  
Turning off the window wiper  
system and flick wipe  
NOTICE  
The wiper blades can wear out or become  
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry  
window for a longer period of time. The wiper  
motor can overheat. There is a risk of dam-  
age to property. Do not use the wipers when  
the window is dry.  
Press the lever down.  
▷
Turn off: press the lever down until it  
reaches the 0 position.  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
▷
Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0  
position.  
The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-  
sition when released.  
Rain sensor  
Principle  
Turning on window wiper system  
The rain sensor automatically controls the  
wiper operation depending on the intensity of  
the rainfall.  
General information  
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-  
rectly in front of the interior mirror.  
130  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.  
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.  
Safety information  
NOTICE  
Windshield washer system  
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers  
can accidentally start moving in car washes.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti-  
vate the rain sensor in car washes.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Activating rain sensor  
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window  
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.  
There is a risk of accident. Only use the win-  
dow washer system when the washer fluid  
will not freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-  
freeze, if needed.  
NOTICE  
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,  
the washer pump cannot work as intended.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Do  
not use the washer system when the washer  
fluid reservoir is empty.  
Press the lever up once from its 0 position,  
arrow 1.  
Wiping operation is started.  
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.  
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not  
start.  
Cleaning the windshield  
Deactivating rain sensor  
Press the lever back into the 0 position.  
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity  
Pull the lever.  
The washer fluid is sprayed on the windshield,  
and the wipers are turned on briefly.  
Windshield washer nozzles  
Turn the knurled wheel to adjust the sensitivity  
of the rain sensor.  
The windshield washer nozzles are automati-  
cally heated while standby state is switched  
on.  
131  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Folding out the wipers  
1. Turn on standby state.  
Fold-out position of the wipers  
Principle  
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down until  
the wipers stop in a nearly vertical position.  
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be  
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-  
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper  
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-  
tions.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the  
windshield.  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
Folding in the wipers  
1. Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.  
2. Switch on standby state and press and  
hold the wiper lever down again.  
Wipers return to their rest position and are  
ready again for operation.  
132  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Shifting  
Manual transmission  
Safety information  
Warning  
General information  
Depending on the motorization, the RPM dur-  
ing a shifting operation is adjusted automati-  
cally as required for harmonious gear chang-  
ing.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
Reverse gear  
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.  
To overcome the resistance push the gearshift  
lever dynamically to the left and engage re-  
verse gear with a forward shifting movement.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle  
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without  
its own drive, for instance in a car wash, or be  
pushed.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
1. Turn on standby state.  
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out of a  
forward gear or reverse.  
3. Release the parking brake.  
NOTICE  
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive RPM  
can damage the engine. There is a risk of  
damage to property. When shifting into 5th or  
6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.  
Steptronic transmission  
Principle  
The Steptronic transmission combines the  
functions of an automatic transmission with  
the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.  
Shift pattern  
Safety information  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
your vehicle, secure it against rolling away,  
e.g., by applying the parking brake.  
▷
▷
1–6: forward gears.  
R: reverse gear.  
133  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Selector lever positions  
Engaging selector lever positions  
Gear position D  
General information  
Selector lever position for normal driving. All  
gears for forward travel are activated automat-  
ically.  
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you  
select a gear position or reverse gear, main-  
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are  
ready to drive off.  
R is reverse  
Engage selector lever position R only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
In certain situations, e.g., to rock free on snow,  
it is possible to shift between reverse gear and  
gear position D without pressing the brake.  
Functional requirements  
Neutral N  
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on  
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible  
to change from selector lever position P to an-  
other selector lever position.  
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without  
drive, for instance in car washes, in selector  
lever position N.  
Parking position P  
The selection lever position P cannot be  
changed until all technical prerequisites are  
met.  
General information  
Selector lever position, for instance for parking  
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the indi-  
vidual wheels in selector lever position P.  
Engaging selector lever position D, N,  
R
Engage selector lever position P only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
A selector lever lock prevents the following in-  
correct operation:  
▷
Unintentional shifting into selector lever po-  
sition R.  
P is engaged automatically  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-  
cally in situations such as the following:  
▷
Unintentional shifting from selector lever  
position P into another selector lever posi-  
tion.  
▷
After the drive-ready state is switched off  
and selector lever position R, D or M/S is  
engaged.  
▷
▷
After the standby state has been turned off  
when selector lever position N is engaged.  
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the  
driver's door is opened while the vehicle  
is stationary and selector lever position D,  
M/S, or R is engaged.  
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se-  
lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the  
vehicle may begin to move. Also set parking  
brake.  
Additional information:  
Parking brake, refer to page 126.  
134  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle  
1. Fasten driver's seat belt.  
2. Press and hold the button to release the  
selector lever lock.  
General information  
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to  
roll without its own drive for a short distance,  
for instance in a car wash or to be pushed.  
Engaging selector lever position N  
NOTICE  
Selector lever position P is automatically en-  
gaged when standby state is switched off.  
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk  
of damage to property. Do not switch off  
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g.,  
in a car wash.  
3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc-  
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The  
selector lever automatically returns to the  
center position when released.  
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing  
on the brake pedal.  
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.  
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold.  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 127.  
4. If necessary, loosen the belt.  
5. If necessary, open the door.  
6. Depress the brake pedal.  
Engaging selector lever position P  
7. Touch the selector lever lock and engage  
selector lever position N.  
8. Switch off drive-ready state.  
In this way, standby state remains switched  
on, and a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
The vehicle can roll.  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-  
cally after approximately 35 minutes.  
If the system is not operational, you may not  
be able to change the selector lever position.  
Press button P.  
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if  
needed.  
Additional information:  
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock,  
refer to page 137.  
135  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Activating manual mode  
Kickdown  
1. Press the selector lever to the left from se-  
lector lever position D, arrow 1.  
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving  
performance.  
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-  
sistance point at the full throttle position.  
Sport program M/S  
Principle  
The shifting points and shifting times in the  
Sport program are designed for sportier han-  
dling. The transmission, for instance shifts up  
later and the shifting times are shorter.  
2. Press the selector lever forward or pull it  
backward, arrows 2.  
Activating the Sport program  
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is  
changed.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster, for instance M1.  
Shifting  
▷
To downshift: press the selector lever for-  
ward.  
▷
Upshifting: pull the selector lever rear-  
wards.  
Press the selector lever to the left from selector  
lever position D.  
The transmission continues shifting automati-  
cally in certain situations, for instance when  
RPM limits are reached.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster, for instance S1.  
The sport program of the transmission is acti-  
vated.  
Steptronic Sport transmission: prevent  
automatic upshifting in M/S manual  
mode  
Depending on the motorization: if driving mode  
SPORT is selected, the Steptronic Sport trans-  
mission does not automatically upshift in  
M/S manual mode once the maximum speed  
is reached.  
Ending the Sport program  
Press the selector lever to the right.  
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.  
Manual mode M/S  
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick-  
down.  
Principle  
Additional information:  
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual  
mode.  
SPORT, refer to page 139.  
136  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Ending the manual mode  
Shifting  
Press the selector lever to the right.  
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.  
Shift paddles  
Principle  
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow  
you to change gears quickly while keeping  
both hands on the steering wheel.  
▷
▷
▷
Upshifting: pull the right shift paddle.  
Downshifting: pull left shift paddle.  
General information  
Downshifting to the lowest possible gear:  
keep the left shift paddle pulled.  
Shifting  
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and  
road speeds.  
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in-  
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.  
Short-term manual mode  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift  
paddle switches into manual mode tempora-  
rily.  
The selector lever position is  
displayed, for example P.  
After conservative driving in manual mode  
without acceleration or shifting via the shift  
paddles for a certain amount of time, the  
transmission switches back to automatic  
mode.  
Electronic unlocking of the  
transmission lock  
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:  
▷
Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is  
displayed in the instrument cluster.  
General information  
Unlock the transmission lock electroni-  
cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a  
hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.  
▷
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,  
pull the left shift paddle.  
Continuous manual mode  
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the  
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll-  
ing away.  
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift  
paddle switches into manual mode perma-  
nently.  
Engage selector lever position N  
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can crank  
the engine.  
Steptronic Sport transmission  
With the appropriate transmission version, the  
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul-  
taneously activating kickdown and operating  
the left shift paddles. This is not possible in  
short-term manual mode.  
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.  
2. Press and hold the Start/Stop button. The  
starter must audibly start.  
137  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
3. With your free hand, press the button on  
the selector lever, arrow 1, and press the  
selector lever into selector lever position N  
and hold, arrow N, until selector lever posi-  
tion N is displayed in the instrument cluster.  
Functional requirement  
Launch Control is available when the engine  
is at operating temperature. The engine is at  
operating temperature after an uninterrupted  
trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Starting with launch control  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
2.  
Press the button.  
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument  
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF  
illuminates.  
3. Engage selector lever position S.  
4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on  
the brake.  
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector  
lever.  
5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal  
beyond the resistance point at the full throt-  
tle position, kickdown.  
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter  
stops.  
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous  
area and secure it against rolling away.  
A destination flag is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Additional information:  
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait  
briefly until the engine speed is constant.  
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.  
Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 318.  
Launch Control  
7. Release the brake within 3 seconds after  
the destination flag illuminates.  
Principle  
The vehicle accelerates.  
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration  
on roads with good traction under dry sur-  
rounding conditions.  
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as  
the destination flag is displayed and the ac-  
celerator pedal is not released.  
General information  
The use of Launch Control causes premature  
component wear since this function represents  
a very heavy load for the vehicle.  
Repeated use during a trip  
After Launch Control has been used, the trans-  
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes  
before Launch Control can be used again.  
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding  
conditions, when used again.  
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in.  
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving  
off with Launch Control.  
After using Launch Control  
Additional information:  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control as soon as possible.  
Break-in, refer to page 256.  
138  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
An experienced driver may be able to achieve  
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.  
Driving modes  
Buttons in the vehicle  
Driving Experience Control  
Button  
SPORT  
SPORT  
Driving  
mode  
Configura-  
tion  
Principle  
The Driving Experience Control influences the  
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle.  
SPORT  
INDIVID-  
UAL  
The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the  
situation using various driving modes.  
SPORT  
PLUS  
General information  
The following systems are affected, for in-  
stance:  
COMFORT  
ECO PRO  
COMFORT  
ECO PRO  
INDIVID-  
UAL  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Engine characteristics.  
Steptronic transmission.  
Adaptive M chassis.  
Steering.  
ADAPTIVE  
ADAPTIVE  
When drive-ready state is switched on, the  
COMFORT driving mode is selected automati-  
cally.  
Display in the instrument cluster.  
Cruise control.  
Driving modes in detail  
COMFORT  
Overview  
Principle  
The COMFORT driving mode is a balanced  
setting between sporty and consumption-opti-  
mized driving.  
Turning on  
Press the button repeatedly until  
COMFORT is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
The selected driving mode is  
displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter.  
SPORT  
Principle  
The SPORT driving mode is a dynamic setting  
for more agility with an optimized suspension.  
139  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Turning on  
Turning on  
Press the button repeatedly until  
Press the button repeatedly until  
SPORT is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
SPORT PLUS is displayed in the in-  
strument cluster.  
SPORT INDIVIDUAL  
ECO PRO  
Principle  
Principle  
In the SPORT INDIVIDUAL driving mode, indi-  
vidual settings can be adjusted to support driv-  
ing dynamics properties.  
In ECO PRO driving mode, consumption is op-  
timized.  
Turning on  
Configuration  
Press the button repeatedly until ECO  
PRO is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driving mode"  
4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL  
Principle  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
"Damping"  
"Steering"  
In the ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode,  
individual settings can be adjusted to support  
an economical driving style.  
"Engine"  
"Transmission"  
The engine control and comfort features, for  
instance the climate control output, are ad-  
justed.  
Manual transmission: "Gear Shift  
Assistant"  
The engine speed is adjusted for shift-  
ing during downshifting.  
Configuration  
1. "CAR"  
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard  
settings:  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driving mode"  
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD".  
SPORT PLUS  
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard  
settings:  
Principle  
The SPORT PLUS driving mode is a dynamic  
setting for maximum agility with an adjusted  
drive.  
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".  
140  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
ADAPTIVE  
Principle  
The ADAPTIVE driving mode is a balanced  
driving mode that automatically adapts to the  
driving situation and driving style.  
If the navigation system is active, upcoming  
road sections are considered.  
Turning on  
Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis-  
played in the instrument cluster.  
INDIVIDUAL configuration  
General information  
The individual configuration set last is acti-  
vated directly when the driving mode is called  
up again.  
Activating configuration of the driving  
mode  
Press the button for the desired driving mode  
several times.  
141  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
corrected, have the vehicle checked by an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Instrument cluster with enhanced  
features:Overview  
Instrument cluster  
Principle  
1
Fuel gauge 151  
Range 155  
The instrument cluster consists of various digi-  
tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,  
temperatures as well as indicator and warning  
lights.  
2
3
Speedometer  
Central display range 143  
Navigation display  
General information  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may  
be possible to deactivate the display change in  
the instrument cluster via iDrive.  
4
5
Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten-  
tion Camera  
Tachometer 152  
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster  
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's  
Manual.  
Selection lists 157  
Widgets 143  
Trip odometer, see Trip data 157  
Shift lights 153  
Safety information  
ECO PRO displays 261  
Power gauge 152  
Warning  
Status Driving Experience Control 139  
Transmission display 133  
Engine temperature 154  
Outside temperature 155  
Check Control 146  
If the driving information displays on the in-  
strument cluster fail, e.g., the speedometer,  
do not use the vehicle. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Imme-  
diately park the vehicle in a safe manner.  
Turning drive-ready state off and on again  
may correct the malfunction, allowing you to  
continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be  
6
7
8
9
Speed Limit Assistant 206  
Speed Limit Info 192  
142  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The displays may vary depending on the  
equipment and national-market version.  
Time 60  
Instrument cluster without  
enhanced features:Overview  
Driving mode view  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment, if the driving  
mode view is activated, the displays in the in-  
strument cluster will adapt to the respective  
driving mode when a program is changed via  
the Driving Experience Control.  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "CAR"  
1
Fuel gauge 151  
2. "Settings"  
2
3
Speedometer  
3. "Displays"  
Check Control 146  
Widgets 144  
4. "Driving mode view"  
Settings  
Service notifications 155  
Shift lights 153  
Specific displays can be configured individu-  
ally.  
Range 155  
1. "CAR"  
4
5
6
Tachometer 152  
2. "Settings"  
Engine temperature 154  
Outside temperature 155  
Transmission display  
Status Driving Experience Control 139  
Time 60  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Instrument panel"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
7
Speed Limit Info 192  
Instrument cluster with  
extended features: widgets  
Central display range  
Depending on the equipment and configura-  
tion, the following is displayed in the central  
display range of the instrument cluster:  
Principle  
Displays for specific functions can be displayed  
in the instrument cluster.  
▷
Navigation displays such as the map view  
or, if destination guidance is active, a route  
preview with route guidance information.  
The following displays can be selected:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Current entertainment source, e.g., radio.  
Torque and power.  
G-Meter.  
▷
Displays for service notifications.  
Some displays in the central display range can  
be configured individually.  
Trip data.  
Efficiency display.  
143  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Selecting  
Driving  
mode  
Display  
COMFORT  
SPORT  
Average consumption.  
Current consumption.  
Energy recovery.  
ECO PRO  
ECO PRO bonus range.  
Distance traveled in Coasting  
mode.  
Current consumption.  
Continue to press the button on the turn signal  
lever until the desired widget is selected.  
Average consumption  
The average consumption indicates the fuel  
consumption when driving a specific route.  
Display  
Current consumption  
The current fuel consumption display allows  
you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.,  
to drive economically and in an environmen-  
tally-friendly manner.  
Energy recovery  
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of  
the vehicle is converted into electric energy in  
coasting/overrun mode. The vehicle battery is  
partially charged and fuel consumption can be  
reduced.  
G-Meter  
The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-  
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction  
on the vehicle occupants while driving.  
ECO PRO bonus range  
In the ECO PRO driving mode, the yielded ex-  
tension of the range as a result of fuel-efficient  
driving is displayed as ECO PRO bonus range.  
Efficiency display  
Principle  
Information about driving style and consump-  
tion can be displayed in the form of a con-  
sumption display as a widget in the instrument  
cluster, for example.  
Instrument cluster without  
enhanced features: widgets  
General information  
Depending on the activated driving mode, dif-  
ferent information will be displayed:  
Principle  
Displays for specific functions can be displayed  
in the instrument cluster.  
144  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Distance covered.  
Consumption display  
Consumption display.  
Principle  
Current consumption and average con-  
sumption.  
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of  
the vehicle is converted into electric energy in  
coasting/overrun mode. The vehicle battery is  
partially charged and fuel consumption can be  
reduced.  
▷
▷
▷
Digital speed.  
Driver assistance systems.  
Current entertainment source, e.g., radio.  
The current consumption displays the current  
fuel consumption. Check whether you are cur-  
rently driving in an efficient and environmen-  
tally-friendly manner.  
Selecting  
General information  
Energy recovery and current consumption can  
be displayed as bar displays.  
Display  
Continue to press the button on the turn signal  
lever until the desired widget is selected.  
Configuring widgets  
Some widgets can be configured individually.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
▷
▷
▷
Energy recovery, arrow 1.  
3. "Displays"  
Current consumption, arrow 2.  
Average consumption, arrow 3.  
4. "Instrument panel"  
5. "Configure widgets"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Current consumption and average  
consumption  
The widget shows the current consumption  
and average consumption depending on the  
setting for the display of the trip data.  
Information in detail  
Distance covered  
The widget for the distance covered shows the  
total distance and traveled distance depending  
on the setting for the display of the trip data.  
145  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displaying stored Check Control  
messages  
Check Control  
1. "CAR"  
Principle  
2. "Vehicle status"  
The Check Control system monitors functions  
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the  
monitored systems.  
3.  
"Check Control messages"  
4. Select the desired text message.  
General information  
Display  
A Check Control message is displayed as a  
combination of indicator or warning lights and  
text messages in the instrument cluster and, if  
applicable, in the Head-up display.  
Check Control  
At least one Check Control message is  
displayed or stored.  
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and  
a text message may appear on the control dis-  
play.  
Text messages  
Text messages in combination with an icon  
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con-  
trol message and the meaning of the indica-  
tor/warning lights.  
Hiding Check Control messages  
Supplementary text messages  
Additional information such as the cause of a  
fault or the required action can be called up via  
Check Control.  
With urgent messages the added text will be  
automatically displayed on the control display.  
Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-  
ther help can be selected.  
Continuous display  
1. "CAR"  
Some Check Control messages are displayed  
continuously and are not cleared until the fault  
is eliminated. If several faults occur at once,  
the messages are displayed consecutively.  
2. "Vehicle status"  
3.  
"Check Control messages"  
4. Select the desired text message.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
The messages can be hidden for approx.  
8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed  
again automatically.  
Messages after trip completion  
Certain messages displayed while driving are  
displayed again after drive-ready state is  
switched off.  
Temporary display  
Some Check Control messages are hidden  
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The  
Check Control messages are stored and can  
be displayed again later.  
146  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Warning light does not illuminate or illuminates  
continuously: the airbag system or the seat  
belt tensioners may not be operational. Have  
the vehicle checked immediately by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Indicator/warning lights  
Principle  
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument clus-  
ter display the status of some functions in the  
vehicle and indicate when a fault is present in  
the monitored systems.  
Additional information:  
Airbags, refer to page 169.  
General information  
The indicator/warning lights can illuminate in a  
variety of combinations and colors.  
Parking brake  
The parking brake is set.  
Additional information:  
Several of the lights are checked for proper  
functioning and illuminate temporarily when  
drive-ready state is turned on.  
For releasing the parking brake, refer to  
page 127.  
Red lights  
Brake system  
The brake pads are worn or there is  
another issue with the brake system.  
Seat belt reminder  
Indicator light illuminates in the follow-  
ing situations:  
The braking assistance may not be op-  
erational. A higher pedal force may be  
required for the braking process.  
▷
Seat belt on the driver or passenger  
side is not buckled.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
▷
▷
The seat belt reminder can also be acti-  
vated if objects are placed on the front  
passenger seat.  
The seat belt is not buckled on the corre-  
sponding rear seat.  
Risk of collision  
Warning light illuminates or flashes in  
conjunction with an acoustic signal if  
there is risk of imminent collision.  
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned  
correctly.  
Additional information:  
Rear seat belt reminder: seat detection  
▷
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, re-  
fer to page 177.  
The seat belt is not buckled on the cor-  
responding rear seat.  
Forward Collision Warning with  
braking function  
Airbag system  
Warning light illuminates briefly: Indi-  
cates that the entire airbag system and  
seat belt tensioners are operational  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected.  
Increased awareness is required.  
when drive-ready state is switched on.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a vehicle detected.  
147  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Immediately initiate braking or an evasive ma-  
neuver.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control is regulating the drive and  
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.  
Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv-  
ing style to the road conditions.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Warning with braking func-  
tion, refer to page 174.  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability  
Control has failed or is being initialized. Driving  
stability is restricted or has failed.  
Daytime Pedestrian Collision  
Mitigation  
The warning light illuminates and a sig-  
nal sounds: risk of imminent collision  
with a person, e.g., a pedestrian or a  
cyclist detected. Immediately initiate braking or  
an evasive maneuver.  
If the warning light illuminates continuously,  
have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 189.  
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, refer  
to page 177.  
The Dynamic Stability Control  
deactivated or the Dynamic Traction  
Control activated  
Drive power  
Reduced drive power due to an over-  
heated drivetrain.  
The Dynamic Stability Control is deacti-  
vated or the Dynamic Traction Control  
is activated.  
Additional information:  
Power gauge, refer to page 152.  
Additional information:  
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 189.  
Yellow lights  
▷
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to  
page 190.  
Antilock Braking System  
The system may not be operational.  
The Antilock Braking System is not  
available.  
Flat tire monitor  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
The ability to steer may be restricted  
during full braking.  
Reduce your speed and stop cau-  
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering  
maneuvers.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 289.  
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 188.  
148  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-  
ing in the engine.  
Tire pressure monitor  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
Follow the information in the Check  
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-  
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-  
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-  
riod can seriously damage emission control  
components, in particular the catalytic con-  
verter.  
Control message.  
Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-  
ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot  
be detected.  
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Fault caused by systems or devices with  
the same radio frequency: after leaving the  
area of the interference, the system auto-  
matically becomes active again.  
Additional information:  
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to  
page 308.  
In the case of tires with special appro-  
val: the tire pressure monitor was unable  
to complete the reset. Reset the system  
again.  
Green lights  
Wheel without wheel electronics installed:  
Have it checked by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop as needed.  
Rear seats: seat belt fastened  
The seat belt is buckled on the corre-  
sponding rear seat.  
Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by  
an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Rear seats: seat detection  
Additional information:  
The seat belt is buckled on the corre-  
sponding rear seat.  
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 282.  
Steering system  
Turn signal  
Steering system may not be opera-  
tional.  
Turn signal is on.  
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator  
light indicates that a turn signal bulb  
has failed.  
Have the vehicle checked by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Turn signal, refer to page 129.  
Exhaust emissions  
▷
The warning light illuminates:  
Parking lights  
Worsening exhaust emissions, e.g.,  
due to an incorrectly fitted fuel cap.  
Have the vehicle checked as soon  
as possible.  
Parking lights are switched on.  
Additional information:  
Parking lights/low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 163.  
▷
The warning light flashes under certain cir-  
cumstances:  
149  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Low-beam headlights  
Automatic Hold: vehicle secured  
against rolling away  
Low-beam headlights are switched on.  
Additional information:  
Steptronic transmission: The vehicle is  
prevented from rolling away after the  
brake is applied.  
Parking lights/low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 163.  
Additional information:  
Driving, refer to page 122.  
Lane departure warning  
Depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version:  
Manual Speed Limiter  
The indicator light illuminates: the sys-  
tem is switched on.  
The indicator light illuminates: the sys-  
tem is switched on. A lane boundary has been  
detected on at least one side of the vehicle and  
the system is ready to intervene. Warnings will  
be issued. The system can perform steering  
interventions.  
The indicator light flashes: the set  
speed limit has been exceeded.  
Additional information:  
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 194.  
Indicator light flashes: the system is perform-  
ing a steering intervention.  
Depending on the equipment: Cruise  
Control  
Additional information:  
Lane departure warning, refer to page 179.  
The system is active.  
Additional information:  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
Driver assistance systems, Cruise Con-  
trol, refer to page 192.  
Automatic High Beam Assistant is  
switched on.  
High-beam headlights are switched on  
and off automatically depending on the traffic  
situation.  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go  
function switched on  
Additional information:  
The system is turned on.  
Additional information:  
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to  
page 165.  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go  
function, refer to page 199.  
Automatic Hold: vehicle is held  
automatically  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go  
function: vehicle ahead  
Steptronic transmission: Automatic  
Hold is activated. The vehicle is auto-  
matically held in place when it is sta-  
tionary.  
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has  
been detected ahead of you. The vehi-  
cle icon goes out if no vehicle has been  
detected ahead of you.  
Additional information:  
Driving, refer to page 122.  
Indicator light is flashing: vehicle ahead is driv-  
ing off.  
150  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Gray lights  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,  
refer to page 199.  
Manual Speed Limiter  
The system is interrupted.  
Speed Limit Assistant activated  
Additional information:  
Depending on the equipment, the indi-  
cator light is illuminated together with  
the icon for a speed control system:  
Speed Limit Assistant is active and detected  
speed limits can be accepted manually for the  
displayed system.  
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to  
page 194.  
Depending on the equipment: Cruise  
Control  
The system is interrupted.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 206.  
Driver assistance systems, Cruise Con-  
trol, refer to page 192.  
Speed Limit Assistant: apply speed  
limit  
The detected speed limit can be ap-  
plied with the SET button. As soon as  
the speed limit has been applied, a  
green checkmark is displayed.  
Fuel gauge  
Principle  
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-  
played.  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 206.  
General information  
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to  
vary.  
Blue lights  
High-beam headlights  
Additional information:  
High-beam headlights have been  
switched on.  
Refueling, refer to page 266.  
Additional information:  
Display  
High-beam headlights, refer to page 129.  
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:  
An arrow next to the fuel pump  
icon indicates the vehicle side  
on which the fuel filler flap is lo-  
cated.  
Drive power  
Reduced drive power due to a cold  
drivetrain.  
The current range is displayed  
as numerical value.  
Additional information:  
Power gauge, refer to page 152.  
Instrument cluster without enhanced features:  
151  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
An arrow next to the fuel pump  
icon indicates the vehicle side  
on which the fuel filler flap is lo-  
cated.  
matically adjusted depending on the available  
rotational speed range.  
Instrument cluster with  
extended features:Power  
gauge  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
The yellow indicator light illuminates,  
once the fuel reserve is reached.  
Principle  
The power gauge indicates the available drive  
power as a percentage.  
Tachometer  
Activate/deactivate  
1. "CAR"  
General information  
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In  
this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect  
the engine.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Instrument panel"  
5. "Engine display"  
6. "Power meter"  
Depending on the equipment, the tachometer  
can also be shown in the Head-up display.  
When the setting for the driving mode view is  
activated, the activated power gauge is only  
shown in the COMFORT driving mode.  
Instrument cluster with enhanced  
features:Activating/deactivating  
1. "CAR"  
Display  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Instrument panel"  
5. "Engine display"  
6. "Tachometer"  
When the setting for the driving mode view  
is activated, the activated tachometer is only  
shown in the COMFORT or SPORT driving  
mode.  
Needle in the area of arrow 1: display of the  
energy recovered by coasting or when deceler-  
ating, CHARGE.  
To display the tachometer in the Head-up dis-  
play, the sport displays of the Head-up display  
must be activated.  
Needle in the range of arrow 2: the drive power  
in percent, POWER.  
Reduced rotational speed range  
The available rotational speed range may be  
reduced due certain factors such as a cold  
drive system. The tachometer display is auto-  
152  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Drive power  
Turning on/turning off  
Steptronic Sport transmission:  
The available drive power may be reduced due  
to certain factors, for instance a cold engine.  
Depending on the available drive power, the  
range for POWER is adjusted automatically.  
1. If applicable, select SPORT or SPORT  
PLUS driving mode.  
Press Driving Experience Control.  
If needed, icons in the power gauge indicate a  
reduction of the drive power.  
2. Activate the M manual mode of the trans-  
mission.  
Example  
icon  
Description  
Manual transmission:  
Depending on the equipment, select either  
SPORT or SPORT PLUS driving mode. Press  
Driving Experience Control.  
Reduced drive power due to a  
cold drivetrain.  
Reduced drive power due to an  
overheated drivetrain.  
Display  
Shift lights  
Principle  
Shift lights on the instrument cluster indicate  
the time to upshift in order to achieve the best  
possible acceleration.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the Shift lights are active in  
the M manual mode of the Steptronic Sport  
transmission and with manual transmission.  
The Shift lights display is available either in the  
instrument cluster or in the Head-up display.  
Instrument cluster without enhanced features.  
Functional requirement  
▷
Depending on the equipment, either driving  
program SPORT or SPORT PLUS is acti-  
vated.  
Information about the driving style  
▷
The current RPM is displayed in the tach-  
ometer.  
▷
To display the Shift lights in the Head-up  
display, the sport displays of the Head-up  
display must be activated.  
▷
Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields  
indicate an increase in the RPM.  
153  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Arrow 2: successive fields illuminated or-  
ange indicate an optimal shift point.  
Engine temperature  
Arrow 3: the field illuminates red. Do not  
wait any further to shift.  
Display  
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:  
When the maximum rotational speed is  
reached, the entire display flashes red and the  
fuel supply is interrupted in order to protect the  
engine.  
▷
Cold engine: the needle is at  
the low temperature value.  
Drive at moderate RPM and  
vehicle speeds.  
▷
Normal operating tempera-  
ture: the needle is in the mid-  
dle or in the lower half of the  
temperature display.  
Standby state and drive-  
ready state  
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:  
▷
Hot engine: the needle is at the high tem-  
perature value. In addition, a Check Control  
message is displayed.  
OFF is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster. Drive-ready state  
is turned off and standby state  
turned on.  
Instrument cluster without enhanced features:  
▷
Cold engine: the LEDs of the  
indicator show a low temper-  
ature value. Drive at moder-  
ate RPM and vehicle speeds.  
READY is displayed in the  
instrument cluster. The Auto  
Start/Stop function is ready for  
automatic engine start.  
▷
Normal operating tempera-  
ture: the LEDs of the indica-  
tor show an average temper-  
ature value.  
Instrument cluster without enhanced features:  
The word OFF in the tachom-  
eter indicates that drive-ready  
state is switched off and  
▷
Hot engine: the LEDs of the indicator show  
a high temperature value. In addition, a  
Check Control message is displayed.  
standby state is switched on.  
Additional information:  
The word READY in the instru-  
ment cluster indicates that the drive-ready  
state is turned on and the Auto Start/Stop  
function is ready to start the engine automat-  
ically.  
Coolant level, refer to page 305.  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
A red indicator light is displayed.  
Additional information:  
Operating state of the vehicle, refer to  
page 38.  
154  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Outside temperature  
NOTICE  
General information  
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the  
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.  
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel  
promptly.  
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower,  
a signal sounds.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.  
Safety information  
Display  
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:  
Warning  
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃  
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on  
bridges or shady sections of the road. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Modify your driving style to the weather  
conditions at low temperatures.  
The current range is displayed  
as a numerical value next to the  
fuel gauge.  
Instrument cluster without enhanced features:  
The current range is displayed  
as numerical value between  
speedometer and tachometer.  
Range  
Principle  
The range indicates the distance that can still  
be covered with the current full tank of fuel.  
Service notifications  
General information  
The estimated range with remaining fuel is  
permanently displayed on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
Principle  
The service notifications indicate recom-  
mended maintenance work.  
With a low remaining range, a Check Control  
message is briefly displayed. A low remaining  
range means that engine functions cannot al-  
ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when  
cornering at speed.  
General information  
After turning on the drive-ready state, the next  
service appointment or the distance remaining  
until the next service is displayed briefly in the  
instrument cluster.  
The Check Control message appears  
continuously below a range of approx.  
30 miles/50 km.  
A service advisor can read out the mainte-  
nance work from the vehicle key.  
155  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Display  
Gear shift indicator  
Detailed information on the service  
notifications  
More information may be displayed on the  
control display.  
Principle  
The shift point indicator recommends the gear  
that best suits the current driving situation. Us-  
ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-  
ing style.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Vehicle status"  
General information  
3.  
"Required services"  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the gear shift indicator is active  
in the M manual mode of the Steptronic trans-  
mission and with manual transmission.  
Maintenance work as well as possible le-  
gally mandated inspections are displayed.  
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa-  
tion.  
Manual transmission: displaying  
Suggestions to upshift or downshift are dis-  
played in the instrument cluster.  
Icons  
Icons  
Description  
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the  
engaged gear is displayed.  
No service is currently required.  
Example  
Description  
The time for recommended main-  
tenance or a legally mandated in-  
spection is approaching.  
Efficient gear is set.  
Shift into efficient gear.  
Service interval is exceeded.  
Steptronic transmission: displaying  
Suggestions to upshift or downshift are dis-  
played in the instrument cluster.  
Entering appointment dates  
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in-  
spections.  
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the  
engaged gear is displayed.  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are  
set correctly.  
Example  
Description  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Vehicle status"  
Efficient gear is set.  
3.  
"Required services"  
4. "Vehicle inspection"  
5. "Date:"  
Shift into efficient gear.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
156  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Button  
Function  
Selection lists  
Change the entertainment  
source.  
Principle  
Pressing the button again will  
close the currently displayed  
list.  
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used  
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or  
the Head-up display.  
▷
▷
▷
Entertainment source.  
Show list of most recent tele-  
phone calls.  
Current audio source.  
List of most recent telephone calls.  
Turn the knurled wheel to se-  
lect the desired setting.  
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open  
on the control display.  
Press the knurled wheel to  
confirm the setting.  
Display  
The list of the current en-  
tertainment source can be  
displayed in the instrument  
cluster again by turning the  
knurled wheel.  
Trip data  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment version, the list  
in the instrument cluster may differ from the  
illustration.  
The trip data display provides various informa-  
tion about the trip, e.g., trip distance.  
General information  
The trip data can be displayed on the control  
display and in the instrument cluster.  
Displaying and using the list  
The lists can be displayed and operated using  
the buttons on the steering wheel.  
The values can be displayed and reset de-  
pending on various intervals such as after refu-  
eling.  
Display on the control display  
Overview  
The following information is displayed depend-  
ing on the set interval and driving mode:  
▷
▷
Configured interval for displaying trip data.  
Average consumption depending on the  
configured interval.  
157  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Average speed.  
Adjusting the display of the trip data  
The intervals for the display of the trip data  
in the instrument cluster and on the control  
display are adjustable.  
Total time for shut off engine through the  
Auto Start/Stop function.  
▷
▷
Distance traveled in Coasting mode.  
Consumption history in form of a chart.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Trip data"  
Displays  
1. "CAR"  
4. "Values since"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Trip data"  
▷
▷
▷
"Start of trip ( )": the values are auto-  
matically reset approx. four hours after  
the vehicle has come to a standstill.  
Consumption history  
The average consumption is shown in the con-  
sumption history in form of a chart based on  
the distance traveled and the driving mode.  
"Refueling ( )": the values are automati-  
cally reset after refueling with a larger  
quantity of fuel.  
"Factory": average consumption since  
delivery from the factory.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Depending on the equipment, information  
about the distance covered can be displayed  
as widget in the instrument cluster.  
The values since the time of the factory  
delivery are displayed.  
▷
"Individual ( )": the values since the last  
manual reset are displayed. The values  
can be reset at any time.  
The following information is displayed:  
▷
▷
▷
Total kilometers.  
Configured interval for displaying trip data.  
Resetting average values manually  
The following interval can be reset manually at  
any time: "Individual ( )".  
Distance traveled depending on the config-  
ured interval.  
▷
Average speed.  
Selecting and setting widgets in the instrument  
cluster.  
With the button on the turn signal lever:  
1. Continue to press the button on the turn  
signal lever until the widget for the trip data  
is selected.  
Additional information:  
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:  
Widgets, refer to page 143.  
Instrument cluster without enhanced features:  
Widgets, refer to page 144.  
2. Press and hold the button on the turn sig-  
nal lever.  
158  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Via iDrive:  
▷
▷
Widget for torque and power.  
Widget for G-Meter.  
1. "CAR"  
Additional information:  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Trip data"  
Widgets, refer to page 143.  
4. "Values since"  
5. "Reset individual"  
Vehicle status  
The average values and counters are reset.  
Once the average values and counters have  
been reset, the following interval is automati-  
cally set: "Individual ( )".  
General information  
The status can be displayed and actions per-  
formed for several systems.  
Going to the vehicle status  
1. "CAR"  
Sport displays  
2. "Vehicle status"  
Principle  
The Sport displays especially support a sporty  
driving style.  
Information at a glance  
Icons  
Description  
Display on the control display  
"Flat Tire Monitor": Status of  
the flat tire monitor, refer to  
page 289.  
Overview  
The following information is displayed:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Boost pressure.  
Engine oil temperature.  
G-Meter.  
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status  
of the Tire Pressure Monitor,  
refer to page 282.  
"Engine oil level": electronic  
oil measurement, refer to  
page 302.  
Torque.  
Power.  
Displays  
1. "CAR"  
"Check Control messages":  
displaying stored Check Con-  
trol messages, refer to  
page 146.  
2. "Driving information"  
3. "Sport displays"  
"Required services": display of  
the service notifications, refer  
to page 155.  
Instrument cluster with enhanced  
features:Display in the instrument  
cluster  
The Sport displays can be displayed in form of  
widgets in the instrument cluster.  
The following widgets can be selected:  
159  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Driver assistance systems.  
Sport displays.  
BMW Head-up display  
Some of this information is only displayed  
briefly as needed.  
Principle  
The Head-up display projects important infor-  
mation in the driver's field of view, for instance  
the speed.  
Selecting displays in the Head-up  
display  
1. "CAR"  
General information  
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up  
display in the Vehicle Care chapter.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Overview  
Setting the brightness  
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the  
ambient brightness.  
The base setting can be adjusted manually.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Brightness"  
The protective glass of the Head-up display is  
located in the position marked.  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright-  
ness is set.  
Turning on/off  
1. "CAR"  
7. Press the Controller.  
2. "Settings"  
When the low-beam headlights are switched  
on, the brightness of the Head-up display can  
be adjusted using the instrument lighting.  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Head-up display"  
Adjusting the height  
1. "CAR"  
Display  
2. "Settings"  
Overview  
3. "Displays"  
The following information is displayed on the  
Head-up display:  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Height"  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle speed.  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height  
is reached.  
Navigation instructions.  
Check Control messages.  
Selection list in the instrument cluster.  
7. Press the Controller.  
160  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The height of the Head-up display can be  
stored using the memory function.  
▷
▷
Seat position.  
Objects on the protective glass of the  
Head-up display.  
Setting the rotation  
The Head-up display view can be rotated.  
▷
Dust or dirt on the protective glass of the  
Head-up display.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windshield dirty on inside or outside.  
Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.  
Wet road.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Rotation"  
Unfavorable light conditions.  
If the image is distorted, have the basic set-  
tings checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting  
is selected.  
7. Press the Controller.  
Special windshield  
The windshield is part of the system.  
Additional settings  
1. "CAR"  
The shape and coating of the special wind-  
shield enable the system to function.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Displays"  
If damaged, have the special windshield re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Speed Limit Assistance": access the  
settings for the speed assistant.  
▷
"Display infotainment lists in": set up if  
the selection lists are displayed in the  
instrument cluster or the Head-up dis-  
play.  
▷
"Sport displays":  
▷
"Off": the Sport displays are not dis-  
played in the Head-up display.  
▷
"In SPORT mode": the Sport dis-  
plays are only displayed in SPORT  
driving mode.  
▷
"Always": the Sport displays are con-  
tinuously displayed in the Head-up  
display.  
Visibility of the display  
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up  
display is influenced by the following factors:  
161  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
Lights  
Icon  
Function  
Vehicle features and options  
Low-beam headlights.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Instrument lighting.  
Right roadside parking light.  
Left roadside parking light.  
Lights and lighting  
Automatic headlight control  
Switches in the vehicle  
Principle  
The low-beam headlights are switched on and  
off automatically depending on the ambient  
brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight  
or if there is precipitation.  
General information  
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can  
cause the lights to be turned on.  
The light switch is located next to the steering  
wheel.  
If the low-beam headlights are switched on  
manually, the automatic headlight control is  
deactivated.  
Icon  
Function  
Lights off.  
Activating  
Daytime driving lights.  
Press the button on the light switch.  
Parking lights.  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
Automatic headlight control.  
Adaptive lighting functions.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is illuminated when the low-  
beam headlights are switched on.  
162  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
After the drive-ready state is switched on, the  
automatic headlight control will be activated.  
System limits  
The automatic headlight control cannot re-  
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-  
tions.  
Low-beam headlights  
For example, the sensors are unable to detect  
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn  
the lights on manually.  
Turning on  
Press the button on the light switch.  
The low-beam headlights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
Parking lights, low-beam  
headlights and roadside  
parking lights  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
Press the button again to switch on the low-  
beam headlights when the standby state is  
switched on.  
General information  
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-  
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting  
is automatically switched off after a period of  
time.  
Turning off  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
low-beam headlights can be switched off in  
the low speed range.  
Parking lights  
Press the button on the light switch.  
General information  
The parking lights can only be switched on in  
the low speed range.  
Roadside parking lights  
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-  
side parking light can be switched on.  
Turning on  
Press the button on the light switch.  
Button Function  
Right roadside parking light on.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
Left roadside parking light off.  
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.  
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-  
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle  
battery and it would then be impossible to  
switch on drive-ready state.  
Switching off the roadside parking light:  
Press the button on the light switch or  
turn on drive-ready state.  
Turning off  
Press the button on the light switch or  
turn on drive-ready state.  
163  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
4. "Pathway lighting"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
6. "OK"  
Welcome lights  
Principle  
The welcome light turns on automatically for  
a limited period of time when approaching or  
unlocking the vehicle.  
Daytime driving lights  
General information  
The daytime driving lights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the exterior  
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.  
Activating/deactivating daytime  
driving lights  
In some countries, daytime driving lights are  
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-  
vate the daytime driving lights in front.  
Activating/deactivating welcome  
light  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
1. "CAR"  
4. Depending on the equipment, select the  
following setting:  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
▷
"Welcome and goodbye"  
4. Depending on the national-market version:  
"Daytime driving lights" or "Daytime driving  
lights, rear"  
When unlocking the vehicle, individual  
lighting functions are switched on for a  
limited time.  
Adaptive lighting functions  
Pathway lighting  
Principle  
Principle  
Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il-  
lumination of the road.  
For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting  
turns on for a certain period of time after leav-  
ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area  
surrounding the vehicle.  
General information  
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of  
one system or multiple systems, depending on  
the equipment version:  
Switching pathway lighting on  
After switching off the drive-ready state, briefly  
push the turn signal lever forward.  
▷
Cornering light.  
Activating  
Setting the duration  
1. "CAR"  
Press the button on the light switch.  
2. "Settings"  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
164  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
The adaptive lighting functions are active  
when the drive-ready state is switched on.  
on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the  
low speed range, the high-beam headlights  
are not switched on by the system.  
The system responds to light from oncoming  
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to  
ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-  
ies.  
Cornering light  
Principle  
The high-beam headlights can be switched on  
and off manually at any time.  
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous  
roads or when turning, an additional cornering  
light is switched on that illuminates the inside  
of the curve when the vehicle is moving below  
a certain speed.  
Activating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
General information  
The cornering light is automatically switched  
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,  
where applicable, the use of turn signals.  
1.  
Press the button on the light  
switch.  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights  
may be automatically switched on regardless  
of the steering-wheel angle.  
Adaptive headlight range  
control  
The adaptive headlight range control feature  
balances out acceleration and braking proc-  
esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in  
order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is illuminated when the low-  
beam headlights are switched on.  
The headlights are automatically changed be-  
tween low-beam headlights and high-beam  
headlights.  
Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
The blue indicator light in the instru-  
ment cluster illuminates when the sys-  
tem switches on the high-beam head-  
lights.  
Principle  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects  
other road users early on and automatically  
switches the high-beam headlights on or off  
depending on the traffic situation.  
Interruption of journey with activated Auto-  
matic High Beam Assistant: the Automatic  
High Beam Assistant remains activated when  
driving continues.  
General information  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures  
that the high-beam headlights are switched  
165  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deacti-  
vated when manually switching the high-beam  
headlights on and off.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
Setting at standstill only.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
Light is turned off.  
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant, press the button on the turn signal lever.  
Increasing sensitivity  
Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-  
proximately 10 seconds.  
Deactivating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
A Check Control message is displayed. The  
system responds more sensitively.  
Resetting the sensitivity  
Push the turn signal lever to the front again  
for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-  
ready state.  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.  
Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
System limits  
Sensitivity of the Automatic High  
Beam Assistant  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot  
replace the driver's personal judgment of when  
to use the high-beam headlights. When appro-  
priate, dim the high beams manually.  
General information  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant can be adjusted.  
The system may not be fully operational in  
the following situations, and driver intervention  
may be necessary:  
Safety information  
▷
In very unfavorable weather conditions  
such as fog or heavy precipitation.  
Warning  
▷
When detecting poorly-lit road users such  
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders  
and wagons; when driving close to train or  
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.  
If adjustments have been made or the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic  
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. If  
adjustments have been made and the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, make sure that  
oncoming traffic is not momentarily blinded.  
Switch off the high-beam headlights man-  
ually if required.  
▷
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,  
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-  
ing traffic on highways.  
▷
▷
In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-  
ence of highly reflective signs.  
When the windshield in the area in front  
of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or  
covered with stickers, etc.  
166  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
Turning interior lights on/off  
Instrument lighting  
Press the button.  
Functional requirement  
The parking lights or low-beam headlights  
must be switched on to set the brightness.  
To switch off permanently: press the button  
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.  
Turning reading lights on/off  
Setting the brightness  
Press the button.  
Adjust the brightness with the  
knurled wheel.  
Ambient light  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, lighting  
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's  
interior.  
Interior lighting  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, interior  
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient  
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically  
controlled.  
Activating/deactivating ambient  
light  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Overview  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Ambient lighting"  
Buttons in the vehicle  
Turning ambient light on/off  
The ambient light is switched on when the ve-  
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the  
vehicle is locked.  
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,  
it will not be turned on when the vehicle is  
unlocked.  
Selecting the color  
1. "CAR"  
Interior lights  
Reading lights  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Color"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
167  
 
Lights  
CONTROLS  
Setting the brightness  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Brightness"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Dimmed while driving  
Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed  
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Dimmed for night driving"  
168  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
Airbags  
1
Front airbag, driver  
3
4
Side airbag  
Knee airbag  
2
Front airbag, front passenger  
Front airbags  
Side airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag  
protects the side of the body in the chest, lap,  
and head area.  
The front airbag helps protect the driver and  
front passenger in the event of a frontal impact  
in which the seat belts alone would not provide  
adequate protection.  
Knee airbag  
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event  
of a frontal impact.  
169  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Dashboard and windshield on the pas-  
senger's side must stay clear - do not at-  
tach adhesive film or coverings and do not  
attach brackets or cables, for instance for  
navigation devices or mobile phones.  
Protective effect  
General information  
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-  
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.  
Do not bond the airbag cover panels with  
adhesive, do not cover them or modify  
them in any way.  
Information on optimum protective  
effect of the airbags  
▷
▷
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on  
the passenger's side as a storage area.  
Warning  
Keep storage compartments near the air-  
bags closed, e.g., glove compartment or  
center armrest.  
If the seat position is incorrect, the seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly or the deploy-  
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the  
airbag system cannot provide protection as  
intended and may cause additional injuries  
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Follow the information on  
achieving the optimum protective effect of the  
airbag system.  
▷
Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or  
other objects to the front seats that are not  
specifically suited for seats with integrated  
side airbags.  
▷
▷
Do not hang pieces of clothing such as  
jackets over the backrests.  
Never modify either the individual compo-  
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.  
This also applies to steering wheel covers,  
the dashboard, and the seats.  
▷
▷
▷
Keep a distance from the airbags.  
Fasten the seat belts correctly.  
Always grasp the steering wheel on the  
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the  
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the  
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low  
as possible when the airbag is deployed.  
▷
Do not disassemble the airbag system.  
Even when you follow all instructions very  
closely, injury from contact with the airbags  
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.  
The ignition and inflation noise may lead  
to short-term and, in most cases, temporary  
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.  
▷
Adjust seat and steering wheel so that  
hands can be crossed over the steering  
wheel. Select the settings so that the  
shoulder rests against the backrest when  
crossing the hands and the upper body  
is as far back as possible while still main-  
taining a comfortable grip on the steering  
wheel.  
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-  
ities may affect the air bag system; contact  
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-  
tion.  
Warnings and information on the airbags are  
also found on the sun visors.  
▷
Make sure that the front passenger is sit-  
ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in  
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.  
▷
▷
Make sure that occupants keep their heads  
away from the side airbag.  
There should be no additional persons, an-  
imals or objects between an airbag and a  
person.  
170  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Operational readiness of the airbag  
system  
Setting the front seat positions  
The power that deploys the driver's/front  
passenger airbags depends on the position of  
the driver's/front passenger seat.  
Safety information  
To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-  
brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-  
spective message appears on the control dis-  
play.  
Warning  
Individual components can be hot after de-  
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk  
of injury. Do not touch individual components.  
Additional information:  
Seats, refer to page 108.  
Warning  
Automatic deactivation of  
the front passenger airbags  
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,  
malfunction or unintentional deployment of  
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-  
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as  
intended despite the accident severity. There  
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the  
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-  
bled, and scrapped by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Principle  
The system reads if the front passenger seat  
is occupied by measuring the human body's  
resistance.  
The front passenger airbags are activated or  
deactivated.  
General information  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Before transporting a child on the front pass-  
enger seat, refer to the safety information and  
instructions for children on the front passenger  
seat, see Children.  
When drive-ready state is turned on,  
the warning light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indi-  
cating the operational readiness of the entire  
airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.  
Safety information  
Malfunction  
Warning  
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-  
tion, the system must be able to detect  
whether a person is sitting in the front pass-  
enger seat. The entire seat surface must be  
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Make sure that the front  
passenger keeps his or her feet in the foot-  
well.  
▷
Warning light does not illuminate  
when drive-ready state is turned on.  
▷
The warning light illuminates con-  
tinuously.  
The airbag system or the seat belt tension-  
ers may not be operational. Have the vehicle  
checked immediately by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
171  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
passenger's side are not ac-  
tivated.  
Fault of the automatic deactivation  
system  
When transporting older children and adults,  
the front passenger airbags may be deacti-  
vated in certain seat positions. In this case, the  
indicator light for the front passenger airbags  
illuminates.  
▷
The indicator light does not illuminate  
when, for instance, a correctly seated per-  
son of sufficient size is detected on the  
seat. The airbags on the passenger's side  
are activated.  
In this case, change the seat position so that  
the front passenger airbags are activated and  
the indicator light goes out.  
Detected child restraint systems  
The system generally detects children seated  
in a child restraint system, particularly in child  
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the  
point in time when the vehicle was manufac-  
tured. After installing a child restraint system,  
make sure that the indicator light for the front  
passenger airbags illuminates. This indicates  
that the child restraint system has been de-  
tected and the front passenger airbags are not  
activated.  
If it is not possible to establish the desired con-  
dition, do not transport the person in the front  
passenger seat.  
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied  
seat surface:  
▷
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats  
or other items to the front passenger seat  
unless they are specifically determined to  
be safe for use on the front passenger seat.  
▷
Do not place any electronic devices on the  
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys-  
tem is to be installed on it.  
Intelligent Safety  
▷
▷
Do not place objects under the seat that  
can press against the seat from below.  
Principle  
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of  
the driver assistance systems.  
No moisture in or on the seat.  
Indicator light for the front  
passenger airbags  
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger  
airbag in the headliner indicates the operating  
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.  
General information  
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,  
Intelligent Safety consists of one or more sys-  
tems that can help prevent the risk of imminent  
collision.  
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei-  
ther activated or deactivated.  
▷
Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function, refer to page 174.  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light  
shortly illuminates and then indicates whether  
the airbags are either activated or deactivated.  
▷
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, re-  
fer to page 177.  
▷
▷
Lane departure warning, refer to page 179.  
▷
The indicator light illuminates  
when a child is properly  
Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to  
page 182.  
seated in a child restraint  
system or when the seat is  
empty. The airbags on the  
▷
Rear-end collision preparation, refer to  
page 184.  
172  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Settings  
The following settings can be selected for In-  
telligent Safety systems:  
Warning  
▷
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched on. Basic settings are activated  
for the sub-functions, for instance setting  
for warning time.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety sys-  
tems are switched on according to the indi-  
vidual settings.  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": Intelligent Safety  
systems can be configured individually. The  
individual settings are activated and stored.  
As soon as a setting is changed on the  
menu, all settings of the menu are acti-  
vated.  
Warning  
▷
"ALL OFF": All Intelligent Safety systems  
are switched off.  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Display  
Button Status  
Button illuminates green: all Intelli-  
gent Safety systems are switched  
on.  
Button illuminates orange: some  
Intelligent Safety systems are  
switched off or currently unavailable.  
Overview  
Button does not illuminate: all Intel-  
ligent Safety systems are switched  
off.  
Button in the vehicle  
Switching Intelligent Safety systems  
on/off  
General information  
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati-  
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli-  
gent Safety systems activate according to the  
last setting.  
Intelligent Safety  
173  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
style is detected, warnings and brake interven-  
tions occur less frequently.  
Operation  
Press the button.  
The menu for the Intelligent Safety  
system is displayed.  
Safety information  
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched  
off, all systems are now switched on.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": Configure Intelligent  
Safety systems individually if required.  
Press the button repeatedly. The fol-  
lowing settings are switched between:  
▷
▷
"ALL ON"  
"INDIVIDUAL"  
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in-  
dividually switched off.  
Press and hold this button.  
"ALL OFF": The menu is selected. All  
Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Forward Collision Warning  
with braking function  
Principle  
The Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function is a warning function that notifies the  
driver of a possible risk of collision and brakes  
automatically as necessary. In the event of an  
accident, the system helps by reducing impact  
speed.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
General information  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.  
With radar sensor: front radar sensor.  
Additional information:  
The system issues a two-phase warning of  
a possible risk of collision with vehicles at  
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The tim-  
ing of warnings may vary with the current driv-  
ing situation.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-  
dling when responding. If an active driving  
174  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Switching Forward Collision  
Warning on/off  
Icon  
Measure  
Warning light illuminates red: Ad-  
vance warning.  
Turning on the system automatically  
The system is automatically active when the  
vehicle is turned on.  
Brake and increase distance.  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds: Acute warning.  
Turning the system on/off manually  
Brake and make an evasive maneu-  
ver, if necessary.  
Follow instructions for settings, dis-  
play, and operation in the Intelligent  
Safety chapter.  
Prewarning  
Additional information:  
This prewarning is provided, for instance when  
there is impending risk of a collision or the dis-  
tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.  
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 172.  
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking  
as warranted.  
Setting the warning time  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Acute warning with brake function  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
5. "Forward Collision Mitigation"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
An acute warning is displayed in case of the  
imminent risk of a collision when the vehicle  
approaches another object at a high differen-  
tial speed.  
Actively intervene if an acute warning is given,  
e.g., apply brakes. Depending on the driving  
situation and the equipment version, the acute  
warning may be accompanied by a brief acti-  
vation of the braking system.  
▷
▷
▷
"Early"  
"Medium"  
"Late": only acute warnings are dis-  
played.  
With the warning time setting "Late" the brief  
activation of the braking system is omitted.  
Warning with brake function  
If an acute warning is provided, the system  
may also provide assistance such as through  
automatic brake intervention when there is risk  
of collision.  
Display  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the instru-  
ment cluster and Head-up display as applica-  
ble.  
Acute warnings may be provided even when  
there has been no prewarning.  
Brake intervention  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and  
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle  
is used.  
175  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The system may also assist with brake inter-  
vention if there is a risk of collision.  
Detection range  
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,  
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.  
Manual transmission: during a brake interven-  
tion up to a complete stop, the engine may be  
shut down.  
City brake function: the brake intervention oc-  
curs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.  
With radar sensor: the brake intervention oc-  
curs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
Only objects that are detected by the system  
are taken into account.  
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,  
the brake intervention occurs as a brief activa-  
tion of the braking system. No automatic delay  
occurs.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
The braking intervention can be interrupted by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal with suffi-  
cient force or by actively moving the steering  
wheel.  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-  
proached at high speed.  
System limits  
▷
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
Safety information  
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.  
Warning  
Upper speed limit  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily. The system is enabled as soon as  
the speed drops below this value again.  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
176  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
Safety information  
If the driving stability control systems are  
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC  
OFF.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-  
gine via the Start/Stop button.  
Also, do not use this system when towing.  
Warning sensitivity  
The more sensitive the warning settings are,  
for example the warning time, the more warn-  
ings are displayed. Therefore, there may also  
be an excess of unwarranted warnings and re-  
sponses.  
Warning  
Daytime Pedestrian  
Collision Mitigation  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Principle  
The Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation is  
a warning function that notifies the driver of a  
possible risk of collision with pedestrians and  
cyclists and brakes automatically as neces-  
sary. The system issues warnings for speeds  
that are common in towns and cities. In the  
event of an accident, the system helps by re-  
ducing impact speed.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
General information  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.  
With radar sensor: front radar sensor.  
The system issues a warning of a possible  
risk of collision with pedestrians and cyclists at  
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
177  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Detection range  
Warning with brake function  
Display  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
pedestrian or cyclist, a warning light is shown  
on the instrument cluster and Head-up display  
as applicable.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Warning light illuminates red and  
acoustic signal sounds: Risk of immi-  
nent collision detected.  
The detection range in front of the vehicle is  
divided into two areas:  
Alternatively, depending on the vehi-  
cle equipment, a red warning triangle  
illuminates in the instrument cluster.  
▷
Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the  
vehicle.  
▷
Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and  
left of the central area.  
Intervene immediately by braking or making an  
evasive maneuver.  
There is a risk of collision if persons, e.g.,  
pedestrians or cyclists, are located within the  
central area. A warning is issued about pedes-  
trians who are located within the extended  
area only if they are moving in the direction of  
the central area.  
Brake intervention  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and  
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle  
is used.  
Switching Pedestrian Warning  
on/off  
If there is a risk of collision, the system may  
also assist with brake intervention.  
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,  
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.  
Turning on the system automatically  
The system is automatically active when the  
vehicle is turned on.  
Manual transmission: during a brake interven-  
tion up to a complete stop, the engine may be  
shut down.  
Turning the system on/off manually  
The braking intervention can be interrupted by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal with suffi-  
cient force or by actively moving the steering  
wheel.  
Follow instructions for settings, dis-  
play, and operation in the Intelligent  
Safety chapter.  
Additional information:  
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 172.  
178  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
If the driving stability control systems are  
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.  
System limits  
Safety information  
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-  
gine via the Start/Stop button.  
Also, do not use this system when towing.  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Lane departure warning  
Principle  
The lane departure warning alerts when the  
vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the  
lane.  
General information  
This camera-based system warns starting at a  
minimum speed.  
Upper speed limit  
The system responds to pedestrians and cy-  
clists when the vehicle speed is below approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
The minimum speed is country-specific and is  
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety  
systems.  
Detection range  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
Warnings are issued by means of a steering  
wheel vibration.  
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is-  
sued late.  
The system does not provide a warning if the  
turn signal is set in the respective direction be-  
fore exiting the lane.  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
Depending on the equipment version, if in the  
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane  
boundary is crossed, the system may inter-  
vene with a brief active steering intervention  
in addition to vibrating. The system thus helps  
keep the vehicle in the lane.  
▷
▷
Partially hidden persons.  
Persons that are not detected as such be-  
cause of the viewing angle or contour.  
▷
▷
Persons outside of the detection range.  
Persons having a body size less than  
32 in/80 cm.  
Safety information  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in assess-  
ing road and traffic situations. There is a  
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic  
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate Do  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be restricted or not available  
in the following situations:  
179  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
not jerk the steering wheel in response to a  
warning.  
Setting Lane Departure Warning  
Setting the warning time  
1. "CAR"  
Warning  
2. "Settings"  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
5. "Lane Departure Warning"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
▷
▷
▷
"Early"  
"Medium"  
"Reduced": some warnings are sup-  
pressed depending on the situation,  
for instance when purposely driving over  
pathway lines in curves or with dynamic  
passing without a turn signal.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by cameras behind  
the windshield.  
▷
"Off": no warnings are issued.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
1. "CAR"  
Functional requirement  
2. "Settings"  
The camera must detect the lane boundaries  
for the lane departure warning to be active.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"  
5. "Vibration intensity"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Turning the Lane Departure  
Warning on/off  
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety  
systems.  
Turning on the system automatically  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active after every de-  
parture.  
Switching steering intervention on/off  
The steering intervention can be switched on  
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec-  
tion and lane departure warning.  
Turning the system on/off manually  
1. "CAR"  
Follow instructions for settings, dis-  
play, and operation in the Intelligent  
Safety chapter.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
5. "Lane Departure Warning"  
6. "Steering intervention"  
Additional information:  
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 172.  
180  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
steering intervention is automatically active af-  
ter every driving off.  
For instance, the steering intervention will be  
suppressed in the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
With hard accelerating or braking.  
When flashing.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Different system statuses are displayed on  
the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle  
equipment and national-market version.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
In driving situation with high driving dynam-  
ics.  
▷
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Indicator light illuminates green: Sys-  
tem is switched on. A lane boundary  
has been detected on at least one  
side of the vehicle and the system  
is ready to intervene. Warnings will  
be issued. The system can perform  
steering interventions.  
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
When actively merging back to your own  
lane after passing.  
Warning signal  
Depending on the equipment version: in the  
event of multiple active steering interventions  
by the system within 3 minutes without the  
driver's intervention at the steering wheel, an  
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning  
signal will sound at the second steering inter-  
vention. Beginning with the third steering inter-  
vention, a continuous warning will sound.  
Indicator light flashes green: System  
is performing a steering intervention.  
Warning function  
If you leave the lane  
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary  
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates  
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration  
setting.  
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
The warning signal and Check Control mes-  
sage are an encouragement to pay closer at-  
tention to the lane.  
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-  
responding direction before changing the lane,  
a warning is not issued.  
End of warning  
For instance, the warning will be canceled in  
the following situations:  
Steering intervention  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version: if, in the speed range up to  
130 mph/210 km/h a lane boundary is crossed,  
the system may intervene with a brief active  
steering intervention in addition to vibrating.  
The steering intervention supports the driver in  
keeping the vehicle within the lane. The steer-  
ing intervention can be noticed on the steering  
wheel and can be manually overridden at any  
time. During an active steering intervention,  
the display in the instrument cluster will flash.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatically after a few seconds.  
When returning to your own lane.  
With hard accelerating or braking.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
When flashing.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
181  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited.  
▷
▷
With manual steering intervention.  
When another driver assistance system is  
activated, if applicable.  
Active Blind Spot Detection  
▷
▷
Lane boundaries are not detected.  
When the system limits are reached.  
Principle  
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles  
in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from  
behind in the adjacent lane.  
System limits  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
the driver at different levels.  
Safety information  
Warning  
General information  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind and  
next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a  
minimum speed.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
The minimum speed is country-specific and is  
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety  
systems.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
The system indicates whether there are vehi-  
cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching  
from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The  
warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates  
dimly.  
▷
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
Before you change lanes after setting the turn  
signal, the system issues a warning in the  
situations described above. The warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering  
wheel vibrates.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-  
gine via the Start/Stop button.  
182  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Safety information  
Intelligent Safety, refer to page 172.  
Warning  
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot  
Detection  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Setting the warning time  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Safety and Warnings"  
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Warning  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1. "CAR"  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"  
5. "Vibration intensity"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety  
systems.  
Sensors  
Warning function  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Turning Active Blind Spot Detection  
on/off  
Turning the system on/off manually  
Follow instructions for settings, dis-  
play, and operation in the Intelligent  
Safety chapter.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
183  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Prewarning  
System limits of the sensors  
The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror  
indicates when vehicles are in your blind spot  
or approaching from the rear.  
Additional information:  
▷
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Acute warning  
If the turn signal is activated while a vehicle  
is in your hazard area, the steering wheel vi-  
brates briefly and the warning light in the exte-  
rior mirror flashes brightly.  
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed  
much faster than your own.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
The warning stops when the other vehicle has  
left the critical area or the turn signal has been  
deactivated.  
The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,  
for instance by stickers.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited.  
Warning light flashing  
When the vehicle is unlocked, the warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes for self-testing  
purposes.  
Displaying warnings  
Depending on the selected warning settings,  
e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can  
be displayed. However, there may also be an  
excess of unwarranted warnings of critical sit-  
uations.  
System limits  
Safety information  
Warning  
Rear-end collision  
preparation  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the rear-end collision prepara-  
tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-  
hind.  
Upper speed limit  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily.  
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.  
184  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
General information  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by radar sensors on  
the sides at the rear.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-  
hicle.  
Turning rear-end collision  
preparation on/off  
The system is automatically active when the  
vehicle is turned on.  
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a  
certain speed, the system can react as follows:  
▷
Where applicable, the hazard warning  
flashers will be switched on.  
The system is deactivated when reversing.  
▷
Where applicable, the PreCrash functions  
are triggered.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Safety information  
▷
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Functional limitations  
This function may be restricted if the speed  
of the approaching vehicle is much higher or  
similar to your own speed.  
PostCrash iBrake  
Principle  
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash  
iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a  
standstill without intervention by the driver.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
General information  
The PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of a  
further collision and its consequences.  
185  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions.  
At standstill  
After coming to a halt, the brake is released  
automatically.  
Function  
The system is switched on each time drive-  
ready state is switched on.  
Harder vehicle deceleration  
In certain situations, it may be necessary to  
bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than  
automatic braking allows.  
After starting the trip, the system is trained to  
the driver, so that decreasing alertness or fati-  
gue can be detected.  
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the  
brake. The brake pressure will then be higher  
than the brake pressure generated by the au-  
tomatic brake function. Automatic braking is  
interrupted.  
This procedure takes, for example, the follow-  
ing criteria into account:  
▷
Personal driving style, for instance steering  
behavior.  
Canceling automatic braking  
It may be necessary to interrupt automatic  
braking in certain situations, for instance when  
making an evasive maneuver.  
▷
Driving conditions, for instance time, length  
of trip.  
The system is active starting at ap-  
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display a  
break recommendation.  
Cancel automatic braking:  
▷
By depressing the brake pedal for slightly  
longer.  
Break recommendation  
▷
By pressing the accelerator pedal for  
slightly longer.  
Setting break recommendation  
The break recommendation can be switched  
on or off and adjusted via iDrive.  
Fatigue alert  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Principle  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Fatigue and Focus Alert"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
The Fatigue Alert can detect decreasing alert-  
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo-  
notonous trips, for instance on highways. The  
system recommends a break.  
Display  
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,  
a message is displayed in the control display  
with the recommendation to take a break.  
Safety information  
Warning  
During the display, various settings can be se-  
lected.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
one's physical state. An increasing lack of  
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or  
not be detected in time. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Make  
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after  
parking the vehicle. A break recommendation  
can only be displayed again after this time has  
elapsed.  
186  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
System functionality may be limited. If the  
function is limited, either no warning may be  
issued or an unwarranted warning may be is-  
sued. The system function may be limited in  
the following situations, e.g.:  
▷
▷
If the time is set incorrectly.  
At a predominantly driven speed below ap-  
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.  
▷
▷
With a sporty driving style such as during  
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.  
In active driving situations such as when  
changing lanes frequently.  
▷
▷
When the road condition is poor.  
In the event of strong side winds.  
187  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Driving stability control systems  
Vehicle features and options Brake assistant  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
The brake assistant automatically applies  
maximum braking assistance when the brake  
pedal is depressed quickly. This reduces the  
braking distance to a minimum for full braking.  
To make full use of braking assistance, do not  
reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during  
full braking.  
Drive-off assistant  
Antilock Braking System  
Principle  
The drive-off assistant supports driving off on  
uphill grades.  
Principle  
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking  
of the wheels during the braking process.  
Driving off  
1. Hold the vehicle by depressing the brake  
pedal.  
You remain able to steer your vehicle even dur-  
ing full braking, which increases active driving  
safety.  
2. Release the brake pedal and drive off  
quickly.  
General information  
The Antilock Braking System is ready after  
each engine start.  
After the brake pedal is released, the vehicle is  
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.  
Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle  
may roll back slightly.  
Malfunction  
In order to prevent rolling back when driving  
off, use the parking brake.  
The warning light on the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
1.  
Pull and release switch before driving  
off.  
The parking brake is set.  
▷
▷
The Antilock Braking System is not availa-  
ble.  
2. Step on the accelerator pedal sufficiently to  
drive off.  
Steerability is limited during full braking.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
188  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Button in the vehicle  
Principle  
The Dynamic Stability Control helps to keep  
the vehicle on a steady course by reducing  
drive power and by brake intervention on indi-  
vidual wheels.  
General information  
The Dynamic Stability Control will detect, e.g.,  
the following unstable driving conditions:  
▷
▷
Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.  
DSC OFF  
Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which  
can lead to understeering.  
Deactivating/activating the Dynamic  
Stability Control  
Safety information  
General information  
Warning  
If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driv-  
ing stability is limited when accelerating and  
cornering.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control as soon as possible.  
Deactivating the system  
Hold the button down until DSC OFF  
is displayed in the instrument cluster  
and the DSC OFF indicator light is illu-  
minated.  
Warning  
Activating the system  
When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars,  
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This  
increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in crit-  
ical driving situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Drive with  
roof load only with activated Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control.  
Press the button.  
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator  
light turn off.  
189  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Display  
Overview  
In the instrument cluster  
Button in the vehicle  
If the Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated,  
DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter.  
Indicator lights and warning lights  
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic  
Stability Control is deactivated.  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control is regulating the drive and  
brake power.  
DSC OFF  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability  
Control has failed.  
Activating/deactivating the Dynamic  
Traction Control  
Dynamic Traction Control  
Activating the system  
Press the button.  
Principle  
The Dynamic Traction Control is a variant of  
the Driving Stability Control where the drive  
power is optimized.  
TRACTION is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC  
OFF illuminates.  
The system ensures maximum drive power  
on unusual road conditions, for instance unp-  
lowed snow covered roads or loose road surfa-  
ces, but with somewhat limited driving stability.  
Deactivating the system  
Press the button again.  
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica-  
tor light turn off.  
General information  
The vehicle has maximum traction when Dy-  
namic Traction Control is on. Driving stability  
is limited during acceleration and when corner-  
ing.  
Display  
Display in the instrument cluster  
When the Dynamic Traction Control is acti-  
vated, TRACTION is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster.  
A brief activation of the Dynamic Traction Con-  
trol may be useful in the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
When driving in slush or on uncleared,  
snow-covered roads.  
Indicator light  
When driving off from deep snow or loose  
ground.  
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic  
Traction Control is activated.  
When driving with snow chains.  
190  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Automatic program change  
In certain situations, the Dynamic Stability  
Control is activated automatically:  
▷
▷
▷
The Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go  
function is activated.  
On a brake intervention by the Intelligent  
Safety systems.  
The vehicle has a flat tire.  
M sport differential  
The M Sport differential provides for continu-  
ously variable locking of the rear axle differen-  
tial, depending on the driving situation. It pre-  
vents a single rear wheel from spinning and  
depending on the situation, increases the drive  
power of the wheel with greater road grip. This  
significantly improves the traction and driving  
dynamics of the vehicle.  
The driver is responsible adapting his or her  
driving style to the situation.  
Variable sport steering  
The variable sports steering facilitates direct  
and agile handling with little steering effort.  
The variable sports steering works independ-  
ently of the current speed, varying the steering  
gear ratio in line with the steering angle.  
191  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
For information on the current map version  
and map updates, see Map update in the Nav-  
igation system chapter.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Without a navigation system, the system is  
subject to limitations imposed by technology.  
Traffic signs with speed limitations are de-  
tected and displayed only. Speed limits due to  
entering towns/cities, highway signs, etc., are  
not displayed. Speed limits with extra traffic  
signs are always displayed.  
Additional information:  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Speed Limit Info  
Safety information  
Speed Limit Info  
Warning  
Principle  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid  
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if  
necessary, the Head-up display.  
General information  
The camera in the area of the interior mirror  
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as  
well as overhead sign posts.  
Traffic signs with extra icons are considered  
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.  
The traffic sign will then be either displayed  
or ignored depending on the situation in the  
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.  
Overview  
Sensors  
With the navigation system, the system takes  
into account the information stored in the nav-  
igation system and also displays speed limits  
present on routes without signs.  
The system is controlled by cameras behind  
the windshield.  
Additional information:  
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur-  
rent map data for the country in which the ve-  
hicle is operated must be downloaded.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
192  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Displaying Speed Limit Info  
Display  
General information  
Speed Limit Info  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed  
Limit Info is displayed permanently in the in-  
strument cluster or via iDrive.  
Icon  
Description  
Current speed limit.  
Depending on the na-  
tional-market version, it  
is possible to switch  
between the units of  
measurement.  
Activating  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
6. "Speed limits"  
7. "Show current limit"  
Without a navigation  
system the traffic sig-  
nals are grayed out  
after curves or longer  
stretches of distance  
traveled.  
No data for the current  
speed limit available.  
The displays may vary  
depending on vehicle  
equipment.  
Depending on the  
equipment, Speed Limit  
Info not available.  
Warning signals  
Depending on the settings, an acoustic signal  
sounds if the detected speed limit is exceeded  
or the speed limit changes. The display also  
flashes if the detected speed limit is exceeded.  
Settings  
Individual settings can be configured for Speed  
Limit Info, e.g., warnings issued if the speed is  
exceeded or the permissible maximum speed  
changes.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
193  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Manual Speed Limiter  
Principle  
The warning that is issued when a speed limit  
is exceeded may depend on the Speed Limit  
Assistant settings.  
The system can be used to set a speed limit,  
for instance to prevent the vehicle from ex-  
ceeding speed limits.  
Additional information:  
General information  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 206.  
The system can limit the speed, starting at  
20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be driven  
at any speed below the set speed limit.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Overview  
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Functional limitations  
The system function may be limited and may  
provide incorrect information in the following  
situations:  
Button Function  
System on/off.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
For traffic signs that are fully or partially  
concealed by objects, stickers, or paint.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Rocker switch:  
In the case of navigation data that is inva-  
lid, outdated or not available.  
Changing the speed limit.  
In areas not covered by the navigation sys-  
tem.  
Operation  
When roads deviate from the navigation  
such as due to changes in road layout.  
Turning on  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
▷
▷
In case of electronic traffic signs.  
When passing buses or trucks with traffic  
signs applied to them.  
The current speed is adopted as the speed  
limit.  
▷
▷
▷
When the traffic signs do not correspond to  
the standard.  
If the system is switched on while the vehicle is  
stationary or driving at low speeds, the speed  
limit is set to 20 mph/30 km/h.  
When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-  
lel road are detected.  
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
The marking in the speedometer is set to the  
corresponding speed.  
When the speed limit is activated, Dynamic  
Stability Control is switched on and the vehicle  
may change to COMFORT drive mode.  
194  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
Turning off  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
Exceeding the speed limit  
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed  
limit, a warning is issued.  
The system switches off automatically in the  
following situations, for example:  
▷
▷
▷
When the engine is switched off.  
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.  
When Cruise Control is switched on.  
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down  
to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.  
When certain programs are activated via  
the Driving Experience Control.  
When the vehicle speed drops below the set  
speed limit, the limit is automatically reacti-  
vated.  
The displays turn off.  
Interrupting  
If the reverse gear is engaged or in Neutral, the  
system is interrupted when rolling backwards.  
Warning when the speed limit is  
exceeded  
Changing the speed limit  
Visual warning  
If the speed limit is exceeded: the  
indicator light in the instrument clus-  
ter flashes while the vehicle speed is  
greater than the set speed limit.  
Acoustic warning  
▷
If the speed limit is exceeded unintention-  
ally, a signal sounds.  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed limit is set.  
▷
When the speed limit is reduced to be-  
low the current vehicle speed, the signal  
sounds after some time.  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
to the resistance point, the speed limit in-  
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
▷
When the speed limit is intentionally ex-  
ceeded by stepping on the accelerator  
pedal all the way down, there is no signal.  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
past the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
If the set speed limit is reached or unintention-  
ally exceeded such as when driving downhill,  
the vehicle is not actively braked.  
Display in the speedometer  
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the  
speedometer displays the status of the sys-  
tem.  
When the speed limit is set during a trip to  
a value below the current speed, the vehicle  
coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.  
The current speed can also be stored by  
pressing a button:  
195  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive.  
Safety information  
▷
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
No marking: system is  
switched off.  
Indicator light  
Icon  
Description  
The indicator light illuminates: the  
system is switched on.  
The indicator light flashes: the set  
speed limit has been exceeded.  
Warning  
Gray indicator light: the system has  
been interrupted.  
The use of the system can lead to an in-  
creased risk of accidents in the following sit-  
uations, for instance:  
▷
▷
▷
On winding roads.  
Cruise Control  
With high traffic volume.  
On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet  
conditions, or on a loose road surface.  
Principle  
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-  
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.  
The system maintains the set speed. The sys-  
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as  
needed.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Only use the system if driving at  
constant speed is possible.  
General information  
The system can be activated starting at  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise  
control settings may change under certain  
conditions. For instance, acceleration can  
change depending on the driving mode.  
196  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is  
deleted.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Interrupting Cruise Control  
Button Function  
Interrupting manually  
Cruise control on/off.  
When active, press the button.  
Interrupting automatically  
The system is automatically interrupted in the  
following situations, for example:  
Continue cruise control with the last  
setting.  
Interrupt cruise control.  
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
▷
Manual transmission: the clutch pedal is  
depressed for a few seconds or released  
while a gear is not engaged.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Manual transmission: if the gear engaged is  
too high for the current speed.  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed.  
Steptronic transmission: selector lever posi-  
tion D is disengaged.  
Switching cruise control on/off  
While Dynamic Traction Control is enabled  
or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
Turning on  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
Depending on the equipment version,  
press the relevant button on the steer-  
ing wheel.  
Adjusting the speed  
Maintaining and storing the speed  
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as desired speed.  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
Turning off  
Depending on the equipment version,  
press the relevant button on the steer-  
ing wheel.  
Press the rocker switch up or down once while  
the system is interrupted.  
197  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
When the system is switched on, the current  
speed is maintained and stored as the set  
speed.  
switch beyond the resistance point causes  
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.  
Continuing cruise control  
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-  
ometer.  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
The speed can also be stored by pressing a  
button.  
Press the button.  
Changing the speed  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
Press the button with the system in-  
terrupted.  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-  
ues.  
In the following cases, the stored speed value  
is deleted and cannot be called up again:  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed is set.  
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored and  
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the  
road is clear.  
When drive-ready state is switched off.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the  
resistance point, the set speed increases or  
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
Display in the speedometer  
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the  
speedometer displays the status of the sys-  
tem.  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
past the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive, the marking indicates  
the desired speed.  
The maximum speed that can be set de-  
pends on the vehicle.  
▷
Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance  
point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or  
decelerates without pressure on the accel-  
erator pedal.  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted, the marking indi-  
cates the stored speed.  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi-  
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the  
198  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system  
adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set  
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.  
The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-  
uation allows.  
Indicator light  
Icon  
Description  
No indicator light: system is switched  
off.  
The distance can be adjusted at several levels.  
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-  
tive speed.  
Indicator light green: system is active.  
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-  
still and then drives off again within a brief pe-  
riod, the system is able to detect this within the  
given system limits.  
Gray indicator light: the system has  
been interrupted.  
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise  
control settings may change under certain  
conditions. For instance, acceleration can  
change depending on the driving mode.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Some system information can also be dis-  
played in the Head-up display.  
The icon is displayed when the set  
speed is reached.  
Safety information  
Warning  
System limits  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The  
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades  
if the drive power is insufficient.  
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may  
exceed or drop below the set desired speed  
in some situations, for instance on downhill or  
uphill grades.  
Do not use Cruise Control when towing.  
Active Cruise Control with  
Stop&Go function  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
Principle  
Using the Cruise Control, a desired speed and  
a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted  
using the buttons on the steering wheel.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
General information  
The system maintains the set speed on clear  
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-  
matically.  
199  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Overview  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Cruise control on/off.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Continue cruise control with the last  
setting.  
Interrupt cruise control.  
Increase the distance.  
Switch Distance Control on/off.  
Warning  
Reduce distance.  
Risk of accident is greater when there is a  
high speed differential to other vehicles, for  
instance in the following situations:  
Switch Distance Control on/off.  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed.  
▷
▷
▷
When approaching a slowly moving ve-  
hicle at speed.  
Vehicle suddenly swerving into own  
lane.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
When approaching stationary vehicles at  
speed.  
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively  
intervene where appropriate  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Application range  
The system is best used on well-maintained  
roads.  
The minimum speed that can be set is  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
The maximum speed that can be set is limited  
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and  
the vehicle equipment.  
200  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The system can also be activated when sta-  
tionary.  
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
Do not use Cruise Control and Distance Control  
when towing.  
▷
▷
Selector lever position D is disengaged.  
While Dynamic Traction Control is enabled  
or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
Turning on/off and interrupting  
cruise control  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
When the vehicle is stationary, the seat  
belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is  
opened.  
Turning on  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
▷
The system has not detected objects for  
an extended period, for instance on a  
road with very little traffic without curb or  
shoulder markings.  
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
▷
▷
The detection range of the radar is im-  
paired, for instance by contamination or  
heavy precipitation.  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as desired speed.  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
After a longer stationary period when the  
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the  
system.  
Turning off  
To switch off the system while stationary, step  
on brake pedal at the same time.  
Adjusting the speed  
Press the button on the steering wheel:  
Button on the steering wheel.  
Maintaining and storing the speed  
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is  
deleted.  
Interrupting manually  
When active, press the button on the steering  
wheel:  
Button on the steering wheel.  
Press the rocker switch up or down once while  
the system is interrupted. The system will be  
activated.  
If interrupting the system while stationary,  
press on the brake pedal at the same time.  
The current speed is maintained and stored as  
desired speed.  
Interrupting automatically  
The system is automatically interrupted in the  
following situations:  
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-  
ometer.  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
201  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The speed can also be stored by pressing a  
button.  
and maintain the prescribed safety distance,  
possibly by braking.  
Press the button.  
Reducing the distance  
Press the button repeatedly until the  
desired distance is set.  
Changing the speed  
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-  
tance.  
Increasing the distance  
Press the button repeatedly until the  
desired distance is set.  
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-  
tance.  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed is set.  
Continuing cruise control  
If active, the displayed speed is stored and  
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the  
road is clear.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the  
resistance point, the set speed increases or  
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
past the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the  
action.  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
Adjusting the distance  
Press the button on the steering wheel with  
the system interrupted:  
Safety information  
Button on the steering wheel.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the  
system limits, deceleration can be late. There  
may be a risk of accidents or risk of dam-  
age to property. Be aware of the surround-  
ing traffic situation at all times. Adjust the  
distance to the traffic and weather conditions  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-  
ues.  
In the following cases, the stored speed value  
is deleted and cannot be called up again:  
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.  
When drive-ready state is switched off.  
202  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive, the marking indicates  
the desired speed.  
Changing between Cruise Control  
with/without Distance Control  
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted, the marking indi-  
cates the stored speed.  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
The system does not react to traffic driv-  
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the  
stored speed. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Adjust the set  
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as  
needed.  
Distance to vehicle ahead of you  
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you  
is shown.  
Icon  
Description  
Distance 1  
Changing over the Cruise Control mode  
Switching Cruise Control without Distance  
Control off and on:  
▷
Press and hold this button.  
Distance 2  
Distance 3  
Distance 4  
▷
Press and hold this button.  
Switching on distance control:  
▷
Press the button.  
▷
Press the button.  
After changing, a Check Control message is  
displayed.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
This value is set automatically  
after the system is switched  
on.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-  
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.  
No distance control display, as  
the accelerator pedal is being  
pressed.  
Display in the speedometer  
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the  
speedometer displays the status of the sys-  
tem.  
203  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Detected vehicle  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Icon  
Description  
Set speed  
Some system information can also be dis-  
played in the Head-up display.  
Green icon:  
Vehicle has been detected  
ahead of you.  
The icon is displayed when the set  
speed is reached.  
Distance information  
When the distance to the detected vehicle in-  
creases, the vehicle icon in the distance display  
will move away.  
The icon is displayed when the dis-  
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead  
is too short.  
If necessary, drive off on your own such as by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by press-  
ing the rocker switch.  
The distance information is active in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
▷
▷
Active Cruise Control switched off.  
Display in the Head-up display selected.  
Head-up display, refer to page 160.  
Distance too short.  
Indicator/warning lights  
Icon  
Description  
Indicator light green: system is  
active.  
▷
▷
Speed greater than approx.  
40 mph/70 km/h.  
No indicator light: system is  
switched off.  
System limits  
Vehicle icon flashes:  
Conditions are not adequate  
for the system to work.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
The system was deactivated  
but applies the brakes until  
you actively resume control by  
pressing on the brake pedal or  
accelerator pedal.  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Detection range  
The vehicle icon and distance  
bars flash red and an acoustic  
signal sounds:  
Brake and make an evasive  
maneuver, if necessary.  
System interrupted.  
The detection capability of the system and the  
automatic braking performance are limited.  
204  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be  
detected.  
Cornering  
Deceleration  
The system does not decelerate in the follow-  
ing situations:  
▷
For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving  
road users.  
▷
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
national availability, for red traffic lights.  
When the set speed is too high for a curve,  
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves  
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a  
curve at an appropriate speed.  
▷
▷
For cross traffic.  
For oncoming traffic.  
Merging vehicles  
The system has a limited detection range. Sit-  
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi-  
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be  
detected very late.  
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly  
merges into your lane, the system may not be  
able to automatically restore the selected dis-  
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-  
lected distance in certain situations, including if  
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles  
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly  
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving  
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system  
requests that the driver intervene by braking  
and making an evasive maneuver, if needed.  
When you approach a curve the system may  
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due  
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-  
erates you may compensate for it by briefly  
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator  
pedal the system is reactivated and controls  
speed independently.  
Driving off  
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off  
automatically; for example:  
▷
▷
On steep uphill grades.  
In front of bumps in the road.  
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.  
205  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Weather  
Safety information  
The following restrictions can occur under un-  
favorable weather or light conditions:  
Warning  
▷
▷
Poorer vehicle detection.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that  
are already recognized.  
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-  
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-  
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering  
or making an evasive maneuver.  
Drive power  
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The  
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades  
if the drive power is insufficient.  
Warning  
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may  
exceed or drop below the set desired speed  
in some situations, for instance on downhill or  
uphill grades.  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Speed Limit Assistant  
Principle  
Overview  
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the  
speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-  
plied.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
General information  
Accept suggested speed manually.  
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed  
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,  
this new speed value can be applied for the  
following systems:  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.  
▷
▷
▷
Manual Speed Limiter.  
Cruise control.  
Turning Speed Limit Assistant  
on/off  
1. "CAR"  
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func-  
tion.  
The speed value is suggested as the new de-  
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed  
value, the corresponding system must be acti-  
vated.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
206  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
6. "Speed limits"  
Manual adoption  
A detected speed limit can be applied man-  
ually for the active driver assistance system.  
7. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Adjust manually": detected speed limits  
can be applied manually.  
When the SET icon illuminates, press  
the button.  
▷
"Show anticipation": Depending on the  
national-market version: current and up-  
coming speed limits are displayed in  
the instrument cluster without being ap-  
plied.  
Speed adjustment  
Principle  
▷
▷
"Show current limit": current speed lim-  
its are displayed without being applied  
in the instrument cluster.  
It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is  
applied exactly or with a tolerance.  
"Off": depending on the national-market  
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed  
Limit Assistant will be turned off.  
General information  
You can configure a speed adaptation for all  
speed limits and an additional speed adapta-  
tion for speed limits up to 40 mph/60 km/h.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
A message is displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter when the system and a driver assistance  
system are activated.  
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-  
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or  
deactivated.  
Icon  
Function  
Setting the speed adjustment  
1. "CAR"  
Depending on the equipment version,  
the indicator light illuminates green,  
together with the icon for a speed  
control system:  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. If necessary, "Driving"  
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
6. To perform the desired setting:  
Speed Limit Assistant is active and  
detected speed limits can be applied  
manually for the displayed system.  
▷
"Adjust speed limits": set tolerance for  
the speed adaptation that affects all  
speeds.  
Detected change of a speed limit with  
immediate effect.  
Depending on the national-market  
version, it is possible to switch be-  
tween the units of measurement.  
▷
▷
"2nd adjustment up to": activate or de-  
activate additional speed adaptation.  
"Adjust speed limits": With additional  
speed adjustment activated, set the  
tolerance for speed limits up to  
40 mph/60 km/h.  
Indicator light illuminates green: the  
detected speed limit can be applied  
with the SET button.  
After it has been applied, a green  
checkmark is displayed.  
System limits  
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed  
Limit Info system.  
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.  
207  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Upcoming speed limits can only be accepted  
for the Active Cruise Control.  
General information  
The range of the system, depending on obsta-  
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.  
6 ft/2 m.  
Additional information:  
▷
System limits of Speed Limit Information,  
refer to page 194.  
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-  
pending collision at a distance to the object of  
approx. 27 in/70 cm.  
▷
System limits of the sensors, refer to  
page 35.  
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic  
warning is issued as early as a distance to the  
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.  
Parking assistance systems  
Safety information  
General information  
The parking assistance systems include differ-  
ent individual systems. The individual systems  
help the driver when parking, maneuvering, or  
reversing by providing various assistance func-  
tions, sensors, and camera views.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react  
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's  
surroundings closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 208.  
Active Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 211.  
▷
▷
Side protection, refer to page 212.  
Rearview camera without Surround View,  
refer to page 213.  
▷
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 215.  
Warning  
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance  
Control is activated, the warning can be de-  
layed due to physical circumstances. There is  
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid  
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control  
is not yet active.  
Automatic Parking Assistant, driving out of  
parking space, refer to page 220.  
▷
▷
Back-up Assistant, refer to page 221.  
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 223.  
Park Distance Control  
Principle  
Park Distance Control assists with parking.  
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles  
in front of or behind the vehicle.  
Depending on the equipment, obstacles that  
are detected by the side ultrasonic sensors  
may also be reported by the side protection.  
208  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
Overview  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
Button in the vehicle  
5. If necessary, "Automatic PDC Activation"  
6. "Automatic PDC Activation"  
Depending on equipment, an additional cam-  
era view is also switched on.  
Automatic deactivation during forward  
travel  
The system switches off when a certain dis-  
tance travelled or speed is exceeded.  
Switch the system back on, if needed.  
Park assistance button  
Switching on/off manually  
Press the park assistance button.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
▷
On: the LED illuminates.  
Off: the LED goes out.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
The rearview camera image is displayed if the  
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the  
park assistance button.  
▷
Depending on the equipment: ultrasonic  
sensors on the side.  
Depending on the equipment version, the sys-  
tem cannot be switched off manually if the re-  
verse gear is engaged.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Turning on/off  
Warning  
Turning on automatically  
The system switches on automatically in the  
following situations:  
Signal tones  
General information  
▷
With the engine running, when selector  
lever position R is engaged.  
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle  
is approaching an object. If, for example, an  
object is detected at the front left of the vehi-  
cle, a signal tone sounds from the front left  
speaker.  
▷
Depending on the equipment version: while  
approaching detected obstacles at a speed  
lower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The  
activation distance depends on the situa-  
tion in question.  
The shorter the distance to the object, the  
shorter the intervals.  
You may switch automatic activation when ob-  
stacles are detected on and off.  
When the distance to a detected object is less  
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is  
sounded.  
1. "CAR"  
When there are objects in front of and behind  
the vehicle at the same time, with a distance  
2. "Settings"  
209  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating  
continuous tone will sound.  
Pathway lines are faded in for better estima-  
tion of the space required.  
Steptronic transmission: the intermittent tone  
and continuous tone are switched off if the se-  
lector lever position P is engaged.  
When the image of the rearview camera is dis-  
played, you can switch to the Park Distance  
Control or to a different view with obstacle  
markings if necessary:  
Depending on design version, the intermittent  
tone is switched off after a short time when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
1. Press the Controller to the left, if needed.  
2. For instance "Park. sensors only"  
If an object approaches when the vehicle is  
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.  
Cross traffic warning: depending on the equip-  
ment, you will be warned in the Park Distance  
Control display against vehicles approaching in  
the front or rear from the side.  
Volume  
The volume of the Park Distance Control  
acoustic signals can be adjusted.  
Additional information:  
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 223.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
System limits  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. "Volume PDC signal"  
6. Set the desired value.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Visual warning  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
The approach of the vehicle to an object is  
shown on the control display. Objects that are  
farther away are already displayed on the con-  
trol display before a signal sounds.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 37.  
Limits of ultrasonic measurement  
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-  
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in  
the following situations:  
The display appears as soon as the Park Dis-  
tance Control is activated.  
The sensor detection range is shown in the  
colors green, yellow, and red when obstacles  
are detected there.  
▷
With obstacles and persons at the edge of  
the lane.  
▷
Low objects already displayed, for instance  
curbs, can move into the blind area of the  
210  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
sensors before or after a continuous tone  
sounds.  
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,  
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-  
ble at any time.  
Unwarranted warnings  
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-  
ranted warnings.  
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of  
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Park-  
ing Assistant.  
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance  
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-  
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Malfunction  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react  
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's  
surroundings closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
A white icon appears and the sen-  
sor detection range is shown by the  
shaded area on the control display.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the  
vehicle checked by an authorized service cen-  
ter or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
In addition, the safety information for the Park  
Distance Control and the Automatic Parking  
Assistant apply.  
Active Park Distance Control  
Additional information:  
Principle  
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 208.  
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-  
tiates emergency braking if there is an acute  
risk of collision.  
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 215.  
Temporary switching off  
The Park Distance Control brake function can  
be temporarily switched off:  
General information  
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-  
vented under all circumstances.  
Confirm the message on the control display.  
The function is available below walking speed  
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.  
During continued driving in this surrounding  
situation, no further emergency braking will oc-  
cur.  
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the  
brake intervention.  
After emergency braking to a stop, further  
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-  
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly  
press the accelerator pedal and release as  
needed.  
Settings  
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle  
will be protected by the system.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
211  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 208.  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. "Active PDC with braking interv."  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 215.  
Display  
System limits  
The limits of the systems of the Park Distance  
Control and the Automatic Parking Assistant  
apply.  
If required, deactivate the system via iDrive  
where applicable.  
Side protection  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-  
hicle.  
Principle  
The side protection warns of obstacles on the  
side of the vehicle.  
▷
▷
▷
Color marks: warning against detected ob-  
stacles.  
Gray marks, hatched area: no obstacles  
were detected.  
General information  
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of  
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Park-  
ing Assistant.  
No marks, black area: the area next to the  
vehicle was not yet captured.  
Limits of the side protection  
Safety information  
The system only displays stationary obstacles  
that were previously detected by sensors while  
passing them.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react  
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's  
surroundings closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
The system does not detect whether an obsta-  
cle moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary,  
the marks are shown in black after a certain  
time. The area next to the vehicle must be  
newly captured.  
In addition, the limits of the systems of the  
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Park-  
ing Assistant apply.  
In addition, the safety information for the Park  
Distance Control and the Automatic Parking  
Assistant apply.  
Additional information:  
212  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Sensors  
Rearview camera  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Principle  
▷
Rearview camera.  
The rearview camera helps when reverse  
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the  
vehicle is shown on the control display.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Additionally, assistance functions can be  
shown in the display, e.g., help lines.  
Turning on/off  
Turning on automatically  
Safety information  
The system is switched on automatically if se-  
lector lever position R is engaged when the  
engine is running.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react  
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's  
surroundings closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
Automatic deactivation during forward  
travel  
The system switches off when a certain dis-  
tance travelled or speed is exceeded.  
Switch the system back on, if needed.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment:  
switching on/off manually  
Press the park assistance button.  
Overview  
▷
▷
On: the LED illuminates.  
Off: the LED goes out.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment:  
button in the vehicle  
The parking assistance functions are shown  
on the control display.  
Switching the view via iDrive  
If the rearview camera view is not displayed,  
change the view via iDrive:  
1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the side.  
2.  
"Rear view camera"  
The rearview camera image is displayed.  
Park assistance button  
Functional requirements  
▷
The trunk lid is fully closed.  
▷
Keep the camera's detection range free.  
The camera's detection range can be lim-  
213  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
ited by protruding cargo, a rear-mounted  
luggage rack, or a trailer.  
Pathway lines  
Display on the control display  
Toolbars  
The assistance functions can be activated  
manually via the toolbars on the sides of the  
control display.  
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.  
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space  
required when parking and maneuvering on  
level roads.  
2. With corresponding equipment:  
"Camera image"  
3.  
▷
"Parking aid lines".  
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted  
to the steering movements depending on the  
steering-wheel angle.  
Pathway lines and turning circle lines  
are displayed.  
▷
"Obstacle mark.".  
Depending on the equipment, the ob-  
stacles detected by the Park Distance  
Control are displayed by marks.  
Turning circle lines  
More than one assistance function can be ac-  
tive at the same time.  
Parking aid lines  
General information  
Additional assistance functions can be shown  
in the camera image on the control display.  
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed  
on the camera image together with pathway  
lines.  
More than one assistance function can be ac-  
tive at the same time.  
Turning circle lines show the course of the  
smallest possible turning radius on a level  
road.  
Only one turning circle line is displayed after  
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-  
gle.  
214  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Parking using lanes and turning circle lines  
System limits  
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning  
circle line leads to within the limits of the  
parking space.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where  
the green pathway line covers the corre-  
sponding turning circle line.  
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.  
Deactivated camera  
When the camera is deactivated, for instance  
when the trunk lid is open, the camera image is  
displayed hatched in gray.  
Obstacle marking  
Detection of objects  
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding  
objects such as ledges may not be detected by  
the system.  
Depending on the equipment, some assis-  
tance functions also take into account data  
from the Park Distance Control.  
Depending on the equipment, obstacles be-  
hind the vehicle are detected by the Park Dis-  
tance Control sensors.  
Follow the notes in the Park Distance Control  
chapter.  
The objects displayed on the control display  
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti-  
mate the distance from the objects on the dis-  
play.  
Obstacle markings can be faded into the im-  
age of the rearview camera.  
The colored steps of the obstacle markings  
match the marks of the Park Distance Control.  
Automatic Parking Assistant  
Setting brightness and contrast  
With the rearview camera switched on:  
Principle  
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.  
2.  
"Camera image"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant supports the  
driver in the following situations:  
215  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
When parking parallel to the road, parallel  
parking.  
Control display shows suitable parking spaces  
at the edge of the road next to the vehicle icon.  
When Automatic Parking Assistant is active,  
suitable parking spaces are highlighted and an  
acoustic signal sounds.  
When reverse parking perpendicular to the  
road, perpendicular parking. The system  
orients itself with the middle of the parking  
space.  
If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly  
detected, the system automatically adjusts the  
suitable parking method. In the case of parking  
spaces suitable for parallel and diagonal park-  
ing, a selection menu is displayed. In this case,  
the desired parking method must be selected  
manually.  
▷
Depending on the equipment version: when  
driving out of parallel parking spaces.  
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of  
the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita-  
ble parking spaces are calculated based on the  
objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The  
system status is displayed.  
Manual transmission  
The Automatic Parking Assistant calculates  
the best possible parking line and takes control  
of steering during the parking operation.  
General information  
Operating principle  
The operating principle and operation of the  
system is divided into the following steps:  
Steptronic transmission  
The Automatic Parking Assistant calculates  
the best possible parking line and takes control  
of the following functions during the parking  
operation:  
▷
▷
▷
Parking space search.  
Turning on.  
Parking.  
System status and instructions on required ac-  
tions are displayed on the control display.  
▷
▷
▷
Steering.  
Acceleration and braking.  
Changing gears.  
Parking space search  
The parking operation is automatic.  
Parking space search is always active when-  
ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and  
straight, even if the system is deactivated.  
When the system is deactivated, the displays  
on the control display are shown in gray.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react  
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's  
surroundings closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is acti-  
vated and the parking space search is active.  
216  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirements  
Warning  
For the measurement of parking  
spaces  
The system can steer the vehicle over or  
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Watch surrounding  
traffic closely and actively intervene where  
appropriate  
▷
Maximum speed while driving forward ap-  
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.  
▷
Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-  
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.  
In addition, the safety instructions of the Park  
Distance Control apply.  
Suitable parking space  
Longitudinal parking:  
Additional information:  
Park Distance Control, refer to page 208.  
▷
▷
Minimum length of detected object, e.g.,  
parking vehicle: approx. 3.3 ft/1 m  
Overview  
Minimum length of gap between two ob-  
jects: own vehicle length plus approx.  
2.6 ft/0.8 m.  
Button in the vehicle  
▷
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Perpendicular parking:  
▷
▷
▷
Minimum length of detected object, e.g.,  
parking vehicle: approx. 3.3 ft/1 m  
Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle  
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.  
Minimum depth: own vehicle length.  
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must  
be estimated by the driver. Due to technical  
limitations, the system is only able to ap-  
proximate the depth of perpendicular park-  
ing spaces.  
Park assistance button  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Parking operation  
▷
Doors and trunk lid are closed.  
Steptronic transmission:  
Driver's seat belt is fastened.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
▷
Additional information:  
Turning on/turning off  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
Switching on with the button  
Press the park assistance button.  
The LED illuminates.  
217  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The current status of the parking space search  
is indicated on the control display.  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. "Automatic Parking"  
Automatic Parking Assistant is activated  
automatically.  
6. "Alert if parking space detected"  
Switching on with reverse gear  
1. Shift into reverse.  
Acoustic signals of the Park  
Distance Control  
Depending on national-market version, an  
intermittent tone for Park Distance Control  
sounds during an automatic parking operation.  
The current status of the parking space  
search is indicated on the control display.  
2. If necessary, activate:  
"Autom. Parking"  
A continuous tone sounds when the distance  
to a detected object is less than approx. 8 in-  
ches/20 cm.  
Switching on via iDrive  
The display of the rearview camera or the view  
of the Park Distance Control must be active.  
Parking using the Automatic  
Parking Assistant  
1. For the parking space search, drive past  
parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx.  
22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of max.  
5 ft/1.5 m.  
1. Move the Controller to the right.  
2. Activate the Automatic Parking Assistant  
on the control display:  
"Autom. Parking"  
Turning off  
The system can be switched off manually:  
The parking space search is activated.  
Press the park assistance button.  
The LED goes out.  
The status of the parking space search and  
possible parking spaces are displayed on  
the control display.  
Status of the system  
2. Engage reverse or press the Park Assist  
key.  
Icon  
Meaning  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is acti-  
vated.  
Gray: the system is not available.  
3. Select the suggested parking space for the  
parking maneuver on the control display.  
White: the system is available but  
not activated.  
The parking operation is active. The sys-  
tem takes over the steering.  
System is activated.  
Parking space search is active.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
The parking operation is active. The  
system takes over the steering.  
Manual transmission:  
The best possible parking position will  
come after gear change on the stationary  
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering op-  
eration.  
Turning the acoustic signal for  
suitable parking spaces on/off  
1. "CAR"  
Steptronic transmission:  
2. "Settings"  
218  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
At the end of the parking operation, selec-  
Steptronic transmission:  
tor lever position P is set.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the trunk lid is open.  
If doors are open.  
The end of the parking operation is indi-  
cated on the control display.  
When setting the parking brake.  
During acceleration.  
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if  
needed.  
The brake pedal remains depressed for  
longer while the vehicle is at a standstill.  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant manually  
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be inter-  
rupted at any time:  
▷
When unfastening the driver's seat belt.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Continuing the parking operation  
An interrupted parking operation can be con-  
tinued, if needed.  
▷
Press the park assistance button.  
▷
"Autom. Parking": select the icon on the  
control display.  
Reactivate the Automatic Parking Assistant  
and follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant automatically  
The system is interrupted automatically in the  
following situations:  
System limits  
Safety information  
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
Warning  
▷
▷
Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road.  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
When there are obstacles that are hard to  
overcome such as curbs.  
▷
▷
▷
When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-  
pear.  
The Park Distance Control indicates distan-  
ces that are too small.  
When a maximum number of parking at-  
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-  
ceeded.  
No parking assistance  
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-  
fer assistance in the following situations:  
▷
▷
When changing over to another function on  
the control display.  
The turn signal opposite to the desired  
parking side is switched on.  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
For parking spaces that are only marked  
with lines on the ground. The system ori-  
ents itself according to objects.  
Manual transmission:  
▷
If a gear is selected that does not match the  
instruction on the control display.  
▷
For diagonal parking spaces.  
▷
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
6 mph/10 km/h.  
219  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
General information  
Note the information given in the “Automatic  
Parking Assistant” section.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 37.  
Manual transmission  
Functional limitations  
The Automatic Parking Assistant calculates  
the ideal line for pulling out of the parking  
space and takes over the steering during this  
maneuver until the driver can drive out of the  
parking space without further steering move-  
ments without a problem.  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
▷
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel  
roads.  
▷
▷
▷
On slippery ground.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
Steptronic transmission  
With accumulations of leaves/snow in the  
parking space.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant calculates an  
optimal line for pulling out of a parking space  
and takes control of the following functions  
during the maneuver:  
▷
▷
With a mounted emergency wheel.  
In case of changes to an already-measured  
parking space.  
▷
▷
▷
Steering.  
▷
▷
With ditches or edges, for instance an edge  
of a port.  
Accelerating and braking.  
Changing gears.  
Parking spaces that are not suitable may  
be detected or suitable parking spaces may  
not be detected at all.  
The vehicle maneuvers automatically until the  
vehicle reaches a position in which the driver  
can drive out of the parking space without fur-  
ther steering movements.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Safety information  
The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunc-  
tioned. Have the vehicle checked by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react  
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's  
surroundings closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
Driving out of a parking  
space using the Automatic  
Parking Assistant  
Principle  
The system makes driving out of parallel park-  
ing spaces easier.  
In addition, the safety information for the Park  
Distance Control and the Automatic Parking  
Assistant apply.  
Additional information:  
220  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 208.  
Steptronic transmission:  
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 215.  
The system takes control of the maneuver.  
A message will be displayed at the end of  
the maneuver.  
Functional requirements  
6. Make sure that the traffic situation permits  
driving out of parking space and driving off  
as usual.  
▷
The vehicle was parked manually and ob-  
jects in front of and behind the car are de-  
tected. The distance to a detected curb is at  
least 6 inches/15 cm.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned  
off automatically.  
▷
The vehicle was parked using the Auto-  
matic Parking Assistant and an object is  
detected in front of the vehicle.  
System limits  
The driving out of a parking space function  
may not be offered temporarily under certain  
environmental conditions. The system limits of  
the Park Distance Control and the Automatic  
Parking Assistant continue to apply.  
▷
▷
The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m  
longer than the vehicle.  
The vehicle has been parked in reverse.  
Driving out of a parking space using  
the Automatic Parking Assistant  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
Back-up assistant  
2. Manual transmission:  
Principle  
Press the Automatic Parking Assistant but-  
ton when the vehicle is stationary to switch  
on the Automatic Parking Assistant.  
The Back-up Assistant helps the driver when  
reversing, e.g., when driving out of tight or un-  
clear parking or road situations.  
Steptronic transmission:  
The vehicle stores the driving movements of  
the last distance covered. This stored distance  
covered can be driven back with automated  
steering.  
Press the park assistance button or shift  
into reverse gear when the vehicle is sta-  
tionary to switch on the Automatic Parking  
Assistant.  
General information  
The system takes control of the steering when  
driving in reverse along the stored route.  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right and activate  
the Automatic Parking Assistant on the  
control display:  
"Autom. Parking"  
4. Select the desired direction to drive out of  
the parking space on the control display.  
The driver controls driving the vehicle via ac-  
celerator pedal and brake.  
5. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
The Back-up Assistant uses the operating ele-  
ments and sensors of the Park Distance Con-  
trol and the Automatic Parking Assistant.  
The parking operation is active.  
Manual transmission:  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 208.  
The system takes control of the steering  
when maneuvering in the parking space. A  
message will be displayed at the end of the  
maneuver.  
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 215.  
221  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
5. Take your hands off the steering wheel  
Safety information  
and carefully drive off using the accelerator  
pedal and the brake.  
Warning  
When driving in reverse, pay attention to  
the vehicle's surroundings, and if you en-  
counter an obstacle, stop immediately and  
take over control of the vehicle. Follow the  
instructions for Park Distance Control.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react  
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-  
tions. Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's  
surroundings closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
6. Stop no later than when normal road traffic  
is reached and take control of the vehicle  
such as by shifting to a forward gear.  
At the end of the stored distance travelled,  
a signal will sound and a request will be  
displayed, also with the instruction to take  
control of the vehicle.  
In addition, the safety information for the Park  
Distance Control and the Automatic Parking  
Assistant apply.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
manually  
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-  
tant can be canceled manually:  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Park Distance Control, refer to page 208.  
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 215.  
▷
▷
Via touchscreen:  
"Back-up Assistant"  
Press the button.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Drive forward without interruption to store  
the distance covered.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
automatically  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
▷
▷
A maximum of 165 ft/50 meters are stored.  
To store the distance covered, do not drive  
faster than 22 mph/36 km/h.  
▷
Dynamic Stability Control is activated.  
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
Driving in reverse with automated  
steering  
1. Press the park assistance button or shift  
into reverse gear when the vehicle is  
stationary and the drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
▷
▷
When engaging a forward gear.  
During activation or intervention by driving  
control systems or assist systems.  
▷
▷
After a few minutes when the vehicle is sta-  
tionary.  
The vehicle leaves the stored lane when re-  
versing, for instance at maximum steering  
angle.  
2. Move the Controller to the right.  
3. "Back-up Assistant"  
The system takes over the steering.  
▷
The view on the control display is overlaid  
with messages such as incoming calls.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play where required.  
222  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
General information  
▷
When you reach normal road traffic or if you  
encounter an obstacle, stop immediately  
and take over control of the vehicle.  
▷
The maximum speed when reversing is  
limited to approx. 6 mph/9 km/h.  
If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warn-  
ing is issued and the function may be can-  
celed.  
▷
▷
After driving a stored distance covered with  
major steering-wheel angles, the function  
of the system will be limited for the return  
trip.  
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor  
the area behind the vehicle.  
The system indicates approaching road users.  
In addition, the limits of the systems of the  
Park Distance Control and the Automatic  
Parking Assistant apply.  
Safety information  
Different influences can lead to side deviations  
when driving the stored distance covered in re-  
verse. For example, this includes the following  
factors:  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
Steering movements when the vehicle is  
stationary while storing the distance cov-  
ered.  
▷
▷
The speed is not adapted to the distance  
covered.  
Certain road characteristics such as gradi-  
ents or inclines.  
Cross traffic warning  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Principle  
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of  
perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap-  
proaching from the side are detected sooner  
by the cross traffic warning than is possible  
from the driver's seat.  
223  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Park assistance button  
▷
▷
When the speed exceeds walking speed.  
When a certain distance travelled is ex-  
ceeded.  
Sensors  
▷
With an active parking operation of the Au-  
tomatic Parking Assistant.  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Warning  
Additional information:  
General information  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.  
The control display shows the corresponding  
view, an acoustic signal may sound as neces-  
sary, and the warning light in the exterior mir-  
ror flashes.  
Turning on/off  
Activating/deactivating the system  
With the button  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
1.  
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
3. "Settings"  
Press the park assistance button.  
4. "Cross traffic warning"  
5. "Cross traffic warning"  
Via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes  
if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when  
the vehicle is reversing.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver Assistance"  
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"  
5. "Cross traffic warning"  
6. "Cross traffic warning"  
Display in the Park Distance Control  
view  
Turning on automatically  
If the system was activated on the control dis-  
play, it will automatically be turned on as soon  
as the Park Distance Control or the Panorama  
View is active and a gear is engaged.  
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is  
switched on.  
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-  
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are  
detected by the sensors.  
Switching off automatically  
The system is automatically switched off in the  
following situations:  
224  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Acoustic warning  
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning  
signal sounds if your own vehicle moves into  
the respective direction.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
Crossing objects are moving at a very slow  
or a very fast speed.  
▷
Other objects that hide cross traffic are in  
the capture range of the sensors.  
225  
 
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
Driving comfort  
The shock absorbers are adjusted depending  
on the selected driving mode as well as the  
road condition and driving style.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Additional information:  
Driving Experience Control, refer to page 139.  
Engine sound  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, you can configure the sound  
of the engine.  
1. "CAR"  
Chassis components  
2. "Settings"  
The chassis components are optimized for the  
vehicle and its application range and thereby  
ensure the best possible driving experience.  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Engine sound"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Adaptive M chassis  
Principle  
The Adaptive M chassis is an intelligent, con-  
trollable sport chassis.  
The chassis reduces body movements with a  
sporty driving style or on an uneven road.  
General information  
The intelligent control of the chassis increases  
the driving dynamics and driving comfort de-  
pending on the road condition and driving  
style.  
Setting  
The system offers different shock absorber  
settings ranging from comfortable travel to  
sporty driving.  
226  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends  
having the interior filter changed during vehicle  
maintenance.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Automatic climate control  
Overview  
Buttons in the vehicle  
Air quality  
General information  
The air quality in the interior is improved by the  
following components:  
▷
▷
▷
Emission tested passenger compartment.  
Interior filter.  
Climate control functions  
Air conditioning system to control the  
temperature, air flow and recirculated-air  
mode.  
Button  
Function  
Defrost function.  
▷
▷
Pre-ventilation.  
Automatic recirculated-air control.  
Rear window defroster.  
AUTO program.  
Interior filter  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation  
mode.  
Temperature.  
Depending on the equipment:  
▷
Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-  
flowing air.  
Switching off.  
▷
▷
▷
Nano-particle emissions are reduced.  
Gaseous pollutants are filtered.  
Air flow, manual.  
Air distribution, manual.  
Microbial particles, viruses and allergens  
are filtered.  
227  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Setting the temperature  
Button  
Function  
Using the button:  
Air recirculation mode.  
Press the upper or lower button side  
to set the desired temperature.  
Air conditioning.  
Via iDrive:  
Maximum cooling.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Seat heating, refer to page 116.  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Driver"  
Some of the functions can also be used via  
voice, e.g., temperature.  
6. "Temperature:"  
7. Set the desired temperature.  
Switching climate control functions  
on/off  
Do not rapidly change between different tem-  
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-  
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-  
just the set temperature.  
Turning on  
Press one of the following buttons:  
Air conditioning  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.  
Air conditioning.  
Principle  
Maximum cooling.  
AUTO program.  
The air in the interior will be cooled and dehu-  
midified and, depending on the temperature  
setting, warmed again.  
Air recirculation mode.  
Air flow, manual.  
Functional requirement  
The interior can only be cooled with the drive-  
ready state switched on.  
Air distribution, manual.  
Defrosting the windshield  
Turning off  
Complete system:  
Switch air conditioning on/off  
Press the button.  
Press the button until the automatic  
climate control switches off.  
The LED is illuminated when the air  
conditioning is switched on.  
Depending on the weather, the windshield and  
the side windows may fog up briefly when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
Temperature  
Principle  
Air conditioning is switched on automatically  
with the AUTO program.  
The automatic climate control cools or heats  
to the configured temperature and then keeps  
the temperature constant.  
When using the cooling mode, condensation  
that will exit below the vehicle.  
228  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Automatic"  
Maximum cooling  
Principle  
Depending on the selected temperature and  
outside influences, the air is directed to the  
windshield, side windows, upper body, and  
into the footwell.  
The system is set to the lowest temperature,  
optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode  
with the drive-ready state switched on.  
Point the side air vents toward the side win-  
dows.  
Functional requirement  
The system is available at outside tempera-  
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the  
drive-ready state switched on.  
The air conditioning is switched on with the  
AUTO program.  
The AUTO program is switched off automati-  
cally, when manual air distribution is set.  
Switching maximum cooling on/off  
Press the button.  
Air recirculation mode  
The LED is illuminated when maxi-  
mum cooling is switched on.  
Principle  
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-  
tants in the immediate environment by tempo-  
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The  
system then recirculates the interior air.  
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body  
area. The air vents need to be open for this.  
The air flow can be adjusted with the program  
active.  
When recirculated-air mode is switched off,  
fresh air is directed into the vehicle's interior.  
AUTO program  
Switch air recirculation on/off  
Using the button:  
Principle  
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats  
the car's interior automatically.  
Press the button.  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
when the air-recirculation mode is switched  
on.  
The air flow, air distribution and the tempera-  
ture will be controlled automatically depending  
on the interior temperature and the setting for  
the desired temperature.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
Switching the AUTO program on/off  
2. "Settings"  
Using the button:  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Air quality"  
Press the button.  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
with the AUTO program switched on.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
▷
"Air recirculation"  
"Fresh air"  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
To prevent window condensation, recirculated-  
air mode switches off automatically after a cer-  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
229  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
tain amount of time, depending on the envi-  
ronmental conditions.  
Defrost function  
With constant air recirculation mode, the air  
quality in the interior deteriorates and window  
fogging increases.  
Principle  
Ice and condensation are quickly removed  
from the windshield and the front side win-  
dows.  
If there is window condensation, switch off re-  
circulated-air mode or defog the windows.  
Switching the Defrost function on/off  
Air flow, manual  
Press the button.  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
when the system is switched on.  
Principle  
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted  
manually.  
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the  
system switched on.  
Adjusting the air flow manually  
If there is any window condensation, switch  
on the AUTO program or the air conditioning.  
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.  
Press the lower or upper side of the  
button: decrease or increase air flow.  
The selected air flow is shown on the climate  
control display.  
Rear window defroster  
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the  
vehicle battery.  
Principle  
Ice and condensation are removed from the  
rear window quickly.  
Manual air distribution  
Functional requirement  
The function is operational when the drive-  
ready state is switched on.  
Principle  
The air distribution for climate control can be  
adjusted manually.  
Switching rear window defroster on/off  
Adjusting the air distribution manually  
Press the button. The LED is illu-  
minated with rear window defroster  
switched on.  
Press the button repeatedly. Select  
the desired setting:  
The rear window defroster switches off auto-  
matically after a certain period of time.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windows, upper body area, and footwell.  
Upper body area and footwell.  
Footwell.  
Windows and footwell.  
Windows.  
Windows and upper body.  
Upper body area.  
The selected air distribution is shown on the  
climate control display.  
230  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Button  
Function  
Automatic climate control  
with enhanced features  
Seat heating, refer to page 116.  
Air conditioning.  
Overview  
Open Climate menu such as  
for the following settings: up-  
per body temperature adjust-  
ment, pre-ventilation.  
Buttons in the vehicle  
Some of the functions can also be used via  
voice, e.g., temperature.  
Opening the Climate menu  
Press the button.  
The Climate menu is displayed.  
Climate control functions  
For example, the following climate control  
functions can be accessed via the Climate  
menu:  
Button  
Function  
Temperature.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Air quality.  
Heating/ventilation.  
Pre-ventilation/heating  
Air conditioning.  
Air recirculation mode.  
Maximum cooling.  
AUTO program.  
Individual settings can be entered for some of  
the climate functions, e.g., switching on/off, in-  
tensity.  
Switching climate control functions  
on/off  
Air flow, manual.  
Switching off.  
Intensity AUTO program.  
Turning on  
Press one of the following buttons:  
Air distribution, manual.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.  
Defrost function.  
Climate menu.  
Maximum cooling.  
Rear window defroster.  
AUTO program.  
Air recirculation mode.  
Upper side of the air flow, manual button.  
231  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Air distribution, manual.  
Defrosting the windshield  
The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body  
area heats or cools noticeably, depending on  
the adjusted temperature.  
This does not change the set interior tempera-  
ture for the driver and front passenger.  
Turning off  
Complete system:  
Press and hold the button until the  
integrated automatic climate control  
switches off.  
Adjust temperature of the ventilation  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
Temperature  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Temperature adjustment"  
6. Set the desired temperature.  
Principle  
The automatic climate control cools or heats  
to the configured temperature and then keeps  
the temperature constant.  
The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g.  
colder toward blue, warmer toward red.  
Setting the temperature  
Using the button:  
Air conditioning  
Principle  
Press the upper or lower button side  
to set the desired temperature.  
The air in the interior will be cooled and dehu-  
midified and, depending on the temperature  
setting, warmed again.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
Functional requirement  
The interior can only be cooled with the drive-  
ready state switched on.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"  
6. "Temperature:"  
7. Set the desired temperature.  
8. "OK"  
Switch air conditioning on/off  
Using the button:  
Press the button.  
Via iDrive:  
Do not rapidly change between different tem-  
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-  
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-  
just the set temperature.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "A/C"  
Temperature of the ventilation  
General information  
The temperature of the ventilation in the upper  
body area can be adjusted.  
Depending on the weather, the windshield and  
the side windows may fog up briefly when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
232  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Air conditioning is switched on automatically  
with the AUTO program.  
The LED of the button is illuminated with the  
AUTO program switched on.  
When using the cooling mode, condensation  
that will exit below the vehicle.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
Maximum cooling  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Driver"  
Principle  
The system is set to the lowest temperature,  
optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode  
with the drive-ready state switched on.  
6. "Automatic"  
Depending on the selected settings and out-  
side influences, the air is directed to the wind-  
shield, side windows, upper body, and into the  
footwell.  
Functional requirement  
The function is available at an outside temper-  
ature above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the  
drive-ready state switched on.  
Point the side air vents toward the side win-  
dows.  
Switching maximum cooling on/off  
The air conditioning is switched on with the  
AUTO program.  
Press the button.  
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-  
trols the program so as to prevent window  
condensation as much as possible.  
The LED is illuminated when maxi-  
mum cooling is switched on.  
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body  
area. The air vents need to be open for this.  
The AUTO program is switched off automati-  
cally, when manual air distribution is set.  
The air flow can be adjusted with the program  
active.  
Adjusting the intensity of the air flow  
With the AUTO program switched on, the in-  
tensity can be adjusted. This changes the au-  
tomatic control for the air mass.  
AUTO program  
Principle  
Using the button:  
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats  
the car's interior automatically.  
Press the lower or upper side of the  
button: decrease or increase intensity.  
The air distribution and the temperature are  
controlled automatically depending on the in-  
terior temperature and the desired tempera-  
ture setting including the selected intensity of  
the air flow.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Heating/ventilation"  
5. "Driver"  
Switching the AUTO program on/off  
Using the button:  
Press the button.  
6. "Level"  
7. Set the desired intensity.  
233  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The selected intensity is shown on the climate  
control display.  
Switch air recirculation on/off  
Using the button:  
Press the button.  
Automatic recirculated-air control  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
when the air-recirculation mode is switched  
on.  
Principle  
The automatic recirculated-air control recog-  
nizes pollutants in the outside air. The outside  
air supply is shut off and the interior air is recir-  
culated.  
Via iDrive:  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
General information  
If the system is activated, a sensor detects  
pollutants in the outside air and controls the  
shut-off automatically.  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Air quality"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
▷
"Air recirculation"  
"Fresh air"  
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin-  
uously flows into the interior.  
To prevent window condensation, recirculated-  
air mode switches off automatically after a cer-  
tain amount of time, depending on the envi-  
ronmental conditions.  
With constant air recirculation mode, the air  
quality in the interior deteriorates and window  
fogging increases.  
If there is window condensation, switch off re-  
circulated-air mode or defog the windows.  
With constant air recirculation mode, the air  
quality in the interior deteriorates and window  
fogging increases.  
Switching automatic recirculated-air  
control on/off  
1. "CAR"  
If there is window condensation, switch off re-  
circulated-air mode or defog the windows.  
2. "Settings"  
Air flow, manual  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Air quality"  
5. "Automatic"  
Principle  
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted  
manually.  
Air recirculation mode  
General information  
To adjust the air flow manually switch off  
AUTO program first.  
Principle  
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-  
tants in the immediate environment by tempo-  
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The  
system then recirculates the interior air.  
Adjusting the air flow manually  
Press the lower or upper side of the  
button: decrease or increase air flow.  
When recirculated-air mode is switched off,  
fresh air is directed into the vehicle's interior.  
The selected air flow is shown on the climate  
control display.  
234  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the  
vehicle battery.  
The program is switched off automatically if  
the settings on the front passenger side are  
changed.  
Manual air distribution  
Defrost function  
Principle  
Principle  
The air distribution for climate control can be  
adjusted manually.  
Ice and condensation are quickly removed  
from the windshield and the front side win-  
dows.  
Adjusting the air distribution manually  
Press the button repeatedly. Select  
the desired setting:  
Switching the Defrost function on/off  
Press the button.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windows, upper body area, and footwell.  
Upper body area and footwell.  
Footwell.  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
when the system is switched on.  
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the  
system switched on.  
Windows and footwell.  
Windows.  
If there is window condensation, switch on the  
AUTO program or the air conditioning to utilize  
the condensation sensor. Make sure that air  
can flow to the windshield.  
Windows and upper body area.  
Upper body area.  
The selected air distribution is shown on the  
climate control display.  
Rear window defroster  
SYNC program  
Principle  
Ice and condensation are removed from the  
rear window quickly.  
Principle  
The Sync program can be used to apply the  
settings on the driver's side to the passenger’s  
side.  
Functional requirement  
The function is operational when the drive-  
ready state is switched on.  
Switching the SYNC program on/off  
1. "CAR"  
Switching rear window defroster on/off  
2. "Settings"  
Press the button. The LED is illu-  
minated with rear window defroster  
switched on.  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Synchronize"  
The following settings of the driver's side can  
be transferred to the passenger's side:  
The rear window defroster switches off auto-  
matically after a certain period of time.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.  
Air flow.  
Air distribution.  
AUTO program.  
235  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Ventilation  
Pre-ventilation  
Principle  
Principle  
The air flow directions can be adjusted individ-  
ually for direct or indirect ventilation.  
The car's interior can be cooled or heated  
before driving off with the pre-ventilation. De-  
pending on set temperature and ambient tem-  
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or pos-  
sibly heated using the residual engine heat.  
Setting the ventilation  
General information  
Open the air vents and position them to ensure  
effective climate control.  
General information  
The system can be switched on and off directly  
or via a preset departure time.  
Direct ventilation  
The air flow is directed towards the passen-  
gers. The air flow heats or cools noticeably,  
depending on the adjusted temperature.  
The activation time is determined based on  
the outside temperature. The system promptly  
switches on before the selected departure  
time.  
Functional requirements  
Indirect ventilation  
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state  
and not in drive-ready state.  
The air flow is not directed towards the pas-  
sengers. The vehicle interior is warmed or  
cooled indirectly, depending on the set tem-  
perature.  
▷
The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.  
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle  
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the  
maximum activation time to save the vehi-  
cle battery. The system will be available  
again after the engine is started or after a  
short trip.  
Front ventilation  
▷
▷
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time  
are set correctly.  
Open the air vents to allow air to flow out.  
Switching on/off directly  
▷
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-  
row 1.  
General information  
There are different ways to switch the system  
on or off.  
Knurled wheel for variable opening and  
closing of the air vents, arrow 2.  
The system switches off automatically after a  
certain period of time. The system continues to  
run for some time after being switched off.  
236  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Using the button  
Departure time  
Functional requirement  
Principle  
When the vehicle is in standby state, the pre-  
ventilation can be switched on or off with the  
automatic climate control buttons.  
Different departure times can be set to ensure  
a comfortable interior temperature in the vehi-  
cle at the time of departure.  
▷
One-time departure time: the time can be  
set.  
Turning on  
Press one of the following buttons:  
The system is switched on once.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.  
▷
Departure time with weekday: time and day  
of the week can be set.  
Air conditioning.  
Maximum cooling.  
On the desired weekdays, the system will  
be switched on before the set departure  
time.  
AUTO program.  
Air recirculation mode.  
Upper side of the air flow, manual button.  
Air distribution, manual.  
Defrosting the windshield  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
▷
▷
Set departure times.  
Activate departure times.  
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-  
tween setting/activating the departure time  
and the planned departure time to allow a suf-  
ficient period of time for the climate control.  
Turning off  
Press and hold the bottom button.  
The system switches off after leaving and lock-  
ing the vehicle.  
Setting the departure time  
Via iDrive  
Via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
Turning on  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Pre-ventilation"  
5. "Departure plan"  
6. Select the desired departure time.  
7. Set the departure time.  
8. Select day of the week, if needed.  
9. "OK"  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Pre-ventilation"  
5. "Start now"  
Display  
Icon  
Description  
Activating the departure time  
Icon on the climate control  
display.  
Functional requirement  
To switch on the pre-ventilation automatically  
at the departure time, the departure time must  
be activated first.  
Flashing: the pre-ventila-  
tion is switched on.  
237  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Via iDrive  
or areas with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in  
enclosed garages.  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Pre-ventilation"  
5. "Departure plan"  
Warning  
When stationary climate control is in opera-  
tion, high temperatures can occur underneath  
the body, for instance caused by the exhaust  
system. If combustible materials such as  
leaves or grass come in contact with hot  
parts of the exhaust system, these materi-  
als can ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make  
sure that no combustible materials can come  
in contact with hot vehicle parts during sta-  
tionary climate control operation, e.g. leaves,  
grass, gas, gasoline, oil or other combustible  
objects.  
6. Activate the desired departure time.  
Display  
,
Icon on the climate control display  
signals an activated departure time.  
Pre-conditioning through  
Remote Engine Start  
Principle  
Functional requirements  
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's inte-  
rior prior to start of the trip to a comfortable  
temperature. The system automatically cools,  
vents, and heats depending on the interior, ex-  
ternal, and set temperature. Snow and ice may  
be removed more easily.  
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state  
and not in drive-ready state.  
▷
▷
Battery is sufficiently charged.  
For reasons of safety, the system can only  
be switched on twice consecutively. The  
system will be available again as soon as  
the drive-ready state is activated and deac-  
tivated again.  
The system starts the engine automatically  
and allows it to run for a limited period of time.  
Safety information  
▷
▷
▷
The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.  
Hood is closed.  
DANGER  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time  
are set correctly.  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation  
is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pol-  
lute the area in and around the vehicle or  
penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases  
contain pollutants which are colorless and  
odorless. In enclosed areas or areas with in-  
sufficient ventilation, exhaust gases can also  
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a  
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and  
ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch on  
stationary climate control in enclosed areas  
▷
Air vents are opened.  
Enabling the automatic engine start  
function  
The automatic engine start must be enabled  
once before using the system. Otherwise, the  
engine cannot switch on automatically to cli-  
matize the car's interior.  
238  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Via iDrive:  
Switching off with the Start/Stop  
button  
1. "CAR"  
The system can be switched off directly as fol-  
lows: pressing the Start/Stop button, without  
depressing the brake pedal.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
5. "Remote Engine Start"  
6. "Starting engine for clim. control"  
7. Confirm the disclaimer.  
Switching on via departure time  
General information  
Scheduled departure times can be set up in  
the system to ensure a comfortable interior  
temperature in the vehicle at the time of depar-  
ture.  
Switching on/off directly  
General information  
The system switches off automatically after  
approx. 15 minutes.  
▷
One-time departure time: the time of the  
scheduled departure can be set.  
The system is switched on once.  
For reasons of safety, the system can only be  
switched on twice consecutively. The system  
will be available again as soon as the drive-  
ready state is activated and deactivated again.  
▷
Departure time with weekday: time and day  
of the week of the scheduled departure can  
be set.  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
Switching on via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
▷
▷
Set departure times.  
Activate departure times.  
2. "Settings"  
The climate control function will start approx-  
imately 10 minutes before the set departure  
time and continue for approximately 5 more  
minutes after the departure time.  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
5. "Start now"  
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-  
tween setting/activating the departure time  
and the planned departure time to allow a suf-  
ficient period of time for the climate control.  
Switching on/off via vehicle key  
The system can be switched on and off using  
the vehicle key.  
For reasons of safety, the system can only be  
switched on once. The system will be available  
again as soon as the drive-ready state is acti-  
vated and deactivated again.  
Press the button on the vehicle key three  
times within 1 second.  
After operating the vehicle key, it will take  
approximately 3 seconds until the engine is  
switched on.  
Observe the information about the intended  
use of the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
To switch off the system, press the button  
again three times.  
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 8.  
239  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the departure time via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
5. "Departure plan"  
6. Select the desired departure time.  
7. Set the departure time.  
8. Select day of the week, if needed.  
Activating the departure time via iDrive  
1. "CAR"  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Climate control"  
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"  
5. "Departure plan"  
6. Activate the desired departure time.  
Display  
In the instrument cluster:  
The engine runs for the purpose  
of operating the pre-condition-  
ing. The vehicle is not ready to  
drive.  
The icon on the automatic climate  
control signals an activated departure time.  
The icon flashes while Remote Engine Start  
is running.  
Confirmation signals from the  
vehicle  
The activation of the system is confirmed by  
flashing twice.  
The parking lights are switched on as long as  
the system is switched on.  
240  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Interior equipment  
Safety information  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Warning  
The operation of remote-controlled systems  
with the integrated universal remote control  
such as the garage door may result in injury,  
for example, body parts becoming jammed in  
a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the respective system is clear  
during programming and operation. Also fol-  
low the safety information for the hand-held  
transmitter.  
Integrated universal remote  
control  
Compatibility  
Principle  
If this icon is printed on the packaging  
or in the operating instructions of the  
system to be controlled, the system is  
generally compatible with the integrated Uni-  
versal Remote Control.  
The integrated Universal Remote Control in  
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions  
of remote-controlled systems such as garage  
door drives, barriers, or lighting systems.  
Additional questions are answered by:  
General information  
▷
An authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
The Integrated Universal Remote Control re-  
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.  
To operate the remote control, the buttons on  
the interior mirror must be programmed with  
the desired functions. The hand-held transmit-  
ter for the particular system is required in order  
to program the remote control.  
▷
on the Internet.  
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex  
Corporation.  
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored  
functions for the sake of security.  
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re-  
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door  
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best  
possible operation.  
241  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Canada: if programming with the hand-held  
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the  
interior mirror button and repeatedly press  
and release the hand-held transmitter but-  
ton for 2 seconds.  
Operating elements on the interior  
mirror  
6.  
▷
The LED illuminates green: program-  
ming completed.  
Release the button.  
▷
The LED flashes fast: programming is  
not complete.  
Press the button on the interior mirror  
for 2 seconds and release. Perform this  
procedure three times to complete the  
programming procedure.  
▷
▷
▷
Buttons, arrow 1.  
LED, arrow 2.  
The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re-  
quired for programming.  
If the integrated universal remote con-  
trol remains nonoperational, continue  
with the special features for change  
code wireless systems.  
Programming  
▷
LED does not flash green after 60 sec-  
onds: programming not completed.  
General information  
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must  
be fully charged at the time of programming  
to ensure an optimal range of the integrated  
universal remote control.  
Repeat steps 3 to 6.  
To program other functions on other buttons,  
repeat steps 3 to 5.  
Special feature of the rolling code  
wireless system  
1. Turn on standby state.  
2. Initial commissioning:  
If you are unable to operate the remote-con-  
trolled system after repeated programming,  
please check if the system to be controlled fea-  
tures a rolling code radio system.  
Press and hold the two outer buttons  
on the interior mirror simultaneously for  
approximately 10 seconds until the LED  
flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro-  
gramming of the buttons on the interior  
mirror.  
Refer to the operating instructions for the sys-  
tem.  
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro-  
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror  
will slowly begin flashing orange.  
For systems with a rolling code radio system,  
the integrated universal remote control and the  
system also have to be synchronized.  
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys-  
tem to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to  
30 cm away from the buttons on the inte-  
rior mirror. The required distance depends  
on the hand-held transmitter.  
Please read the operating instructions to find  
out how to synchronize the system.  
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec-  
ond person.  
5. Press and hold the button of the desired  
function on the hand-held transmitter.  
242  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Synchronizing the universal remote control  
with the system:  
Release the button.  
▷
The LED flashes fast: the hand-held  
transmitter was detected but program-  
ming is not complete.  
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-  
controlled system.  
Press the button on the interior mirror  
for 2 seconds and release. Perform this  
procedure three times to complete the  
programming procedure.  
2. Program the relevant button on the interior  
mirror as described.  
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button  
on the system being programmed, e.g. at  
the garage gate. You have approx. 30 sec-  
onds for the next step.  
If the integrated universal remote con-  
trol remains nonoperational, continue  
with the special features for change  
code wireless systems.  
4. Hold down the programmed button on the  
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds  
and then release it. If necessary, repeat this  
step up to three times in order to end syn-  
chronization. Once synchronization is com-  
plete, the programmed function will be car-  
ried out.  
▷
LED does not flash green after 60 sec-  
onds: programming not completed.  
Repeat steps 3 to 6.  
If the programming procedure is not com-  
pleted, the previous programming will remain  
unchanged.  
Reprogramming individual buttons  
1. Turn on standby state.  
Operation  
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to  
be programmed.  
Warning  
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror  
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds,  
release the button.  
The operation of remote-controlled systems  
with the integrated universal remote control  
such as the garage door may result in injury,  
for example, body parts becoming jammed in  
a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the respective system is clear  
during programming and operation. Also fol-  
low the safety information for the hand-held  
transmitter.  
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys-  
tem to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to  
30 cm away from the buttons on the inte-  
rior mirror. The required distance depends  
on the hand-held transmitter.  
5. Press and hold the button of the desired  
function on the hand-held transmitter.  
Canada: if programming with the hand-held  
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the  
interior mirror button and repeatedly press  
and release the hand-held transmitter but-  
ton for 2 seconds.  
The system such as the garage door can be  
operated using the button on the interior mir-  
ror while the drive-ready or standby state is  
switched on. To do this, hold down the button  
within receiving range of the system until the  
function is activated. The interior mirror LED  
stays illuminated while the wireless signal is  
being transmitted.  
6. The LED can illuminate in different ways.  
▷
The LED illuminates green: the pro-  
gramming procedure is completed.  
243  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable  
connectors.  
Deleting stored functions  
All stored functions will be deleted. The func-  
tions cannot be deleted individually.  
Safety information  
Press and hold the two outer buttons on  
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-  
mately 10 seconds until the LED on the interior  
mirror flashes green fast.  
Warning  
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of  
the airbags such as portable navigation devi-  
ces can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or  
be thrown around in the car's interior while  
unfolding. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
damage to property. Make sure that devices  
and cables are not in the airbag's area of  
unfolding.  
Sun visor  
Glare shield  
Fold the sun visor down or up.  
Glare shield from the side  
Warning  
Folding out  
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-  
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the ve-  
hicle may overload or damage the 12 V elec-  
trical system. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Only connect battery  
chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-  
start terminals in the engine compartment.  
1. Fold the sun visor down.  
2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to-  
ward the side window.  
Folding in  
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun  
visor.  
Vanity mirror  
Warning  
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-  
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the  
mirror lighting switches on.  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-  
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,  
these objects can cause a short circuit and  
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of damage to property. Make sure  
to prevent metal objects from falling or being  
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the  
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after  
using the socket.  
Sockets  
Principle  
The socket can be used for electronic devi-  
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
General information  
The total load of all sockets must not exceed  
140 watts at 12 volts.  
244  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the  
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after  
using the socket.  
Center console  
1. Slide the cover forward.  
In the center armrest  
2. The socket is located next to the wireless  
charging tray. Detach the cover.  
A USB port is located in the center armrest.  
Properties:  
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.  
For charging mobile devices.  
Charge current: max. 3 A.  
In the center console  
USB port  
NOTICE  
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g.,  
large USB connectors, may block or damage  
the cover when it is being opened or closed.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Make  
sure that the area of movement of the cover  
is clear while opening and closing it.  
General information  
Follow the information regarding the connec-  
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the  
section on USB connections.  
Additional information:  
USB connections, refer to page 77.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-  
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,  
these objects can cause a short circuit and  
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of damage to property. Make sure  
to prevent metal objects from falling or being  
Slide the cover forward.  
245  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
The USB port is located next to the wireless  
charging tray.  
Mounting position of the product.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Properties:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type A.  
For charging of external devices.  
Charge current: max. 1.5 A  
For data transfer.  
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the  
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on  
the tray together with the device can become  
very hot. Storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips, or  
cards for transmitting signals, may not func-  
tion correctly when placed together on the  
tray with the device. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of damage to property. When charg-  
ing mobile devices, make sure there are no  
objects on the tray together with the device.  
Wireless charging tray  
Principle  
The wireless charging tray allows wireless  
charging of mobile phones and other mobile  
devices certified according to the Qi standard.  
General information  
Overview  
Tray in the center console:  
When inserting the device to be charged, en-  
sure that there are no objects between the de-  
vice to be charged and the wireless charging  
tray.  
The charging process is shown by the  
charge indicator on the control display.  
NOTE  
This device has been tested for human expo-  
sure limits and found compliant at a minimum  
distance of 2 in/5 cm during operation.  
1
LED  
Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be  
maintained in every direction when operating  
the device.  
2
Storage area  
246  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirements  
Forgotten warning  
▷
The device to be charged must be certified  
according to the Qi standard.  
General information  
A warning can be given if a Qi-certified mobile  
phone was forgotten in the wireless charging  
tray when leaving the vehicle.  
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
The mobile phone must not exceed the  
maximum size of approximately 6.0 x 3.1  
x 0.7 in/154.5 x 80 x 18 mm.  
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in-  
strument cluster.  
▷
▷
Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-  
able for wireless charging.  
Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning  
1. "CAR"  
The mobile phone to be charged is located  
in the center of the tray. The mobile phone  
display is pointing upwards.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "General settings"  
4. "Wireless charging tray"  
5. "Activate reminder"  
Inserting the mobile phone  
1. Open the tray cover.  
2. Place the mobile phone centered in the tray  
with the display facing up.  
System limits  
The charge current may be reduced or charg-  
ing may be temporarily interrupted in the wire-  
less charging tray in the following situations:  
3. Close the tray cover.  
LED displays  
▷
▷
▷
Due to excessive temperatures on the sur-  
face of the tray and mobile phone.  
Color Meaning  
If there are objects between the mobile  
phone and the wireless charging tray.  
Blue  
The mobile phone is charging.  
The blue LED stays illuminated once  
the inserted mobile phone with Qi  
capability is fully charged.  
If storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips,  
or cards for signal transmission, are located  
between the mobile phone and wireless  
charging tray.  
Or-  
The mobile phone is not charging.  
ange  
Temperature of the mobile phone  
may be too high or foreign object  
may be in charging tray.  
▷
▷
Due to protective sleeves and covers that  
exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm  
Red  
The mobile phone is not charging.  
Due to protective sleeves and covers made  
of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic  
parts.  
Contact an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
▷
▷
Due to add-on parts for mobile phone, e.g.,  
holders.  
By settings on the mobile phone, for in-  
stance for charging. Follow the relevant in-  
structions on the control display and in the  
instructions for the mobile phone, if applica-  
ble.  
247  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Before use you must register your booster de-  
vice with your wireless provider.  
LTE-Compensator - Information  
and User Manual  
If you should be requested by the FCC to cease  
operating your booster you are not allowed to  
insert your mobile phone in the charging tray  
anymore unless the booster is permanently  
deactivated by your local BMW dealer.  
Your car is equipped with a wireless charging  
tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and  
connect it to the mobile network. To ensure  
the best possible connection a signal booster  
(LTE-Compensator) is used in conjunction with  
the WCA. The following paragraphs refer to  
this booster:  
You must not remove the booster from the car  
nor use it with any other than the preinstalled  
coupling device or antenna. Any modification  
of the existing antenna or coupling device as  
well as the use of other antennas or coupling  
devices will cause the cease of the booster´s  
operating license.  
This is a CONSUMER device.  
BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS  
DEVICE with your wireless provider and have  
your provider's consent. Most wireless provid-  
ers consent to the use of Compensators. Some  
providers may not consent to the use of this  
device on their network. If you are unsure,  
contact your provider. You MUST operate this  
device with approved antennas and cables  
as specified by the manufacturer. Antennas  
MUST be installed at least 20 cm (8 inches)  
from any person. You MUST cease operating  
this device immediately if requested by the  
FCC or a licensed wireless service provider.  
Warning E911 location information may not be  
provided or may be inaccurate for calls served  
by using this device.  
The booster device fulfills the network protec-  
tion standards as required by the FCC such as  
intermodulation limits, oscillation detection and  
gain limits.  
Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive  
Model Number: LTECOMPB0  
Part Number: 6803145-01  
FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0  
Please observe additionally the following infor-  
mation  
▷
▷
▷
Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to regis-  
ter their signal boosters by calling their toll-  
free number.  
T-Mobile  
 
.  
Verizon’s  
tion link:  
 
nal-booster.html).  
▷
▷
AT&T  
 
 
U.S.Cellular  
link  
lar/support/fcc-booster-registration.jsp).  
248  
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Storage compartments  
the event of an accident or when braking or  
making an evasive maneuver. There is a risk  
of injury. Always close storage compartments  
immediately after use.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
Warning  
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can  
damage the dashboard. Attached objects  
could come loose. There is a risk of injury  
or risk of damage to property. Do not use  
anti-slip pads.  
Storage compartments  
Fold-out compartment  
General information  
The vehicle interior contains multiple storage  
compartments for stowing objects.  
Opening the fold-out compartment  
Safety information  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-  
erty. Secure loose objects or devices that are  
connected to the vehicle via a cable.  
Pull the handle.  
Warning  
Open flaps of the storage compartments,  
e.g., glove compartment or center armrest,  
protrude into the interior when folded open  
and may be in the way of an airbag that  
deploys. In addition, objects in the open stor-  
age compartment can be thrown into the ve-  
hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in  
249  
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Glove compartment  
Warning  
Opening the glove compartment  
Breakable objects such as glass bottles or  
glasses can break in the event of an acci-  
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-  
ken glass can be scattered in the car's inte-  
rior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Do not use any breakable objects  
while driving. Only stow breakable objects in  
closed storage compartments.  
Pull the handle.  
Storage compartment in the  
center console  
Closing the glove compartment  
Fold the lid closed.  
Opening the storage compartment  
Locking the glove compartment  
The glove compartment can be locked with  
an integrated key. This prevents access to the  
glove compartment.  
After the glove compartment has been locked,  
the vehicle key can be given to someone with-  
out the integrated key, for example, when the  
car is being parked by a parking attendant.  
Additional information:  
Slide the cover forward.  
Integrated key, refer to page 89.  
Closing the storage compartment  
Pull the cover on the handle back.  
Storage compartments in  
the doors  
Center armrest  
General information  
There are storage compartments in the doors.  
General information  
A storage compartment is located in the center  
armrest between the seats.  
250  
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Opening the storage compartment  
Overview  
Press the button.  
The cup holders are located in the center arm-  
rest.  
The lighting of the center armrest switches on.  
Opening the storage compartment  
Closing the storage compartment  
Press the lid down until it clicks into place.  
Cup holders  
Safety information  
Warning  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may  
damage the cup holders or be thrown about  
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,  
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.  
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-  
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and  
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can  
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Do not force objects into the  
cup holder. Make sure that drink containers  
are secured firmly in the cup holder. Use  
lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable con-  
tainers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately.  
Do not transport hot beverages.  
Press the button.  
The lighting of the center armrest switches on.  
Closing the storage compartment  
Press the lid down until it clicks into place.  
Storage compartment  
behind the seats  
Safety information  
Warning  
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be  
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in  
the event of an accident, braking or an eva-  
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit  
and injured. There is a risk of injury and risk  
251  
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
of damage to property. Stow and secure ob-  
jects and cargo properly.  
General information  
There is a storage compartment behind the  
seats.  
Adjusting the net  
Slide the upper edge of the net up to the cor-  
rect height. Grab the top of the net as close as  
possible to the edge next to the holder. At first,  
a resistance must be overcome.  
252  
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Cargo area  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be  
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in  
the event of an accident, braking or an eva-  
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit  
and injured. There is a risk of injury and risk  
of damage to property. Stow and secure ob-  
jects and cargo properly.  
This chapter describes all standard, country-  
specific, and optional equipment offered with  
the series. It also describes features and func-  
tions that are not necessarily available in the  
vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or  
country versions. This also applies to safety  
functions and systems. When using these  
functions and systems, the applicable laws  
and regulations must be observed.  
NOTICE  
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Make  
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.  
Loading  
Safety information  
Steps for determining correct load  
limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined  
weight of occupants and cargo should  
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the  
vehicle’s placard.  
Warning  
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the  
tires, damage them internally and cause  
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char-  
acteristics may be negatively impacted, re-  
ducing directional stability, lengthening the  
braking distances and changing the steering  
response. There is a risk of accident, injury,  
or property damage. Pay attention to the  
permitted load-carrying capacity of the tires  
and never exceed the permitted gross vehicle  
weight.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers that will be riding in  
the vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs  
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-  
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount  
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five  
150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the  
amount of available cargo and luggage  
load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x  
150) = 650 lbs)  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-  
erty. Secure loose objects or devices that are  
connected to the vehicle via a cable.  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage  
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.  
That weight may not safely exceed the  
253  
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
available cargo and luggage load capacity  
calculated in Step 4.  
Lashing eyes in the cargo  
area  
6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load  
from your trailer will be transferred to the  
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine  
how this reduces the available cargo and  
luggage load capacity of the vehicle.  
General information  
Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo  
such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw  
straps or cargo nets to the lashing eyes in the  
cargo area.  
Payload  
Lashing eyes  
The maximum payload is the sum of the  
weight of the occupants and the cargo.  
The greater the weight of the occupants, the  
less cargo that can be transported.  
There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area  
for securing cargo.  
Stowing and securing cargo  
Net  
▷
Cover sharp edges and corners on the  
cargo.  
▷
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as  
low as possible, ideally directly behind the  
cargo partition wall.  
▷
▷
Fasten the aids for securing the load to the  
lashing eyes in the cargo area.  
Small and light cargo: secure with luggage  
straps or, depending on the equipment,  
with a cargo net or draw straps.  
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the  
left side. To transport larger objects, slide the  
net down. Grab the top of the net as close as  
possible to the edge next to the holder. At first,  
a resistance must be overcome.  
▷
Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo  
straps.  
A storage compartment is located in the cargo  
floor panel behind the net.  
254  
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
the holder. At first, a resistance must be  
overcome.  
Storage compartment on  
the right side  
General information  
A storage compartment is available on the  
right side of the cargo area.  
Opening the storage compartment  
2. Pull on the handle and fold the flap down.  
Unlock the cover of the right side trim panel,  
arrow 1, and fold open, arrow 2.  
3. In the cargo area: open flap completely.  
The flap is secured with a magnet.  
Through-loading system  
Principle  
The through-loading system allows the trans-  
port of long objects such as skis.  
Opening the through-loading  
system  
1. Slide the net down. Grab the top of the net  
as close as possible to the edge next to  
255  
 

Related Topics

Dashboard
Sensors of the vehicle
Operating state of the vehicle
iDrive
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
General settings
Personal settings
Connections
Opening and closing
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Transporting children safely
Driving
Displays
Lights
Safety
Driving stability control systems
Driver assistance systems
Driving comfort
Climate control
Interior equipment
Storage compartments
Cargo area

Popular Owner Manuals

Audi
BMW
Citroen
Ford
Honda
Peugeot

Latest Owner Manuals

Second Generation (2004-2009) Toyota Prius 4 Door Second Generation (2004-2009) Toyota Prius 4 Door
First Generation (1997-2003) Toyota Prius 4 Door First Generation (1997-2003) Toyota Prius 4 Door
Fifth Generation (2019-2026) Toyota Rav4 SUV Fifth Generation (2019-2026) Toyota Rav4 SUV
Third Generation (2006-2012) Toyota Rav4 SUV Third Generation (2006-2012) Toyota Rav4 SUV
Fifth Generation (2020-2025) Toyota Supra 2 Door Fifth Generation (2020-2025) Toyota Supra 2 Door
Twelfth Generation (2018-2026) Toyota Corolla 4 Door Twelfth Generation (2018-2026) Toyota Corolla 4 Door